®
Cayman, Cayman S
Owner’s Manual
WKD 987 621 10
5/09
© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Porsche, the Porsche crest, PCCB, PCM, PDK,
PSM and Tequipment are registered trademarks
and the distinctive shapes of Porsche automobiles
are trademarks of
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Germany
Orientation guides in the
Owner’s Manual
The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are
highlighted in yellow.
Overall Table of Contents
At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an
overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s
Manual.
Section Contents
There is a summary of topics with the corresponding page numbers at the beginning of each
main chapter.
Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
of this Owner’s Manual.
1
Dear Owner,
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a
Porsche Sports car.
Judging by the car you have chosen, you are a motorist of a special breed, and you are probably no
novice when it comes to automobiles.
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you
should take time to familiarize yourself with your
Porsche and its performance characteristics. Always drive within your own unique capabilities as
a driver and your level of experience with your
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize injury, always use your safety belts. Never consume
alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of
your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual contains a host of useful information. Please take the time to read this manual before you drive your new Porsche. Become familiar with the operation of your Porsche car for
maximum safety and operating pleasure. The better you know your Porsche, the more pleasure you
will experience driving your new car.
Always keep your Owner’s Manual in the car, and
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your
Porsche.
A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
by having it serviced regularly.
A separate Warranty and Customer Information Booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your Porsche.
For U.S. only:
If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which
could cause a crash, injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche
Cars N.A.).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety problem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.savercar.gov.
Your car has thousands of parts and components
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of
engineering quality and safety.
2
Warning!
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
lead to accidents and severe or fatal
personal injuries.
Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
interfere with those safety features built into
the vehicle. Modifications may be carried out
on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
manner obeying the local laws and in the
light of driving conditions faced by you, and
in accordance with the instructions provided
in this Owner’s Manual.
f Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
instructions in this manual.
Caution!
The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for
sporting events is not approved by Porsche.
Very high cornering speeds can be achieved
with racing tires. However, the resulting
transverse acceleration values would jeopardize the adequate supply of oil to the engine.
Porsche therefore will not accept any
warranty or accept any liability for damage
occurring as a result of non-compliance with
this provision.
f Do not fit racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
events on your vehicle.
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of
damage.
Damaged or missing aerodynamic components such as spoilers or underside panels
affect the driving behavior and therefore
must be replaced immediately.
Your car may have all or some of the components
described in this manual.
Should you have difficulty understanding any of
the explanations of features or equipment installed
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also
check with your dealer on other available options
or equipment.
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the
driver’s side of the vehicle, and right as the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the information available at the time
of printing.
It has always been Porsche’s policy to continuously improve its products. Porsche, therefore, reserves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improvements in its product without incurring any obligation to install them on products previously manufactured.
Warning!
For your own protection and longer service life of
your car, please follow all operating instructions
and special warnings. These special warnings use
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
warnings contain important messages regarding
your safety and/or the potential for damage to
your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in serious mechanical failure, serious personal injury or
death.
f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
engineering features built into your car.
f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and
consistently with the law, according to the driving conditions, and the instructions in this manual.
Note to owners
In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
Note aux proprietaires
Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
ou du:
Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
5925 Airport Road
Suite 420
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L4V 1W1
Telephone number for customer assistance:
1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could
cause accidents and serious personal injury
or death.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.
3
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
(PCCB)
f Please see the chapter “BRAKES” on Page 56.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause brake noises.
Wear on the different components and braking
system, such as brake pads and brake discs,
depends to a great extent on the individual driving
style and the conditions of use and therefore
cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
The values communicated by Porsche are based
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
style.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
about the current guidelines in effect before
such use of your vehicle.
4
Setting and operating vehicle
components when driving
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or operate the on-board computer, radio, navigation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers may leak, whether
they are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking
from a portable container carried in your vehicle could, in case of an accident, cause a
fire or explosion, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable containers in your vehicle.
Ground Clearance
Caution!
Risk of damage. The vehicle may touch the
ground as a result of reduced ground clearance.
f Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes (e.g.
parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting platforms etc.).
f Avoid steep ramps.
Engine Exhaust
Danger!
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
Engine exhaust fumes have many components which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an enclosed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for prolonged periods with the engine on and the car
not moving.
Hot Exhaust Pipes
Warning!
Risk of burn injury when standing near or
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
supervise children around the vehicle when the
exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Warning!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
5
Table of Contents
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)......
Setting and operating vehicle components
when driving ..................................................
Portable Fuel Containers ................................
Ground Clearance ..........................................
Engine Exhaust ..............................................
4
4
4
4
5
Before driving off................................. 8
Before driving off... ........................................ 8
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers...................... 10
Operation, Safety............................... 13
Keys .......................................................... 15
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15
Doors ......................................................... 18
Central Locking in Cars without Alarm System 19
Central Locking in Cars with Alarm System ... 21
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 25
Power Windows ........................................... 27
Mirrors ........................................................ 29
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating .. 31
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 32
Seat Memory ............................................... 35
Heated Seats .............................................. 37
Seat Ventilation ............................................ 38
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 38
Steering Wheel Heating ................................ 39
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ..................... 40
6
Table of Contents
Sun Visors ...................................................41
Safety Belts .................................................42
Airbag Systems ...........................................44
Child Restraint Systems ................................50
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat ....53
Child Restraint Anchorage .............................54
Sports Exhaust System ................................55
Parking Brake ..............................................55
Brakes .......................................................56
ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System) ...59
Clutch Pedal ................................................60
Sport Mode .................................................61
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) .............63
Porsche Active Suspension Management ............
(PASM) ........................................................66
Rear Spoiler ...............................................67
Fixed rear spoiler .........................................68
Interior lights ...............................................69
Parking Aids ...............................................70
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock .................................72
Starting Procedures .....................................75
Stopping Engine ..........................................76
Emergency Flasher Switch ............................77
Light Switch on Vehicles
with Bi-Xenon Headlights ...............................78
Light Switch on Vehicles
with Halogen Headlights ...............................80
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /Parking light /
Flasher Lever ...............................................81
Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever ...................82
Fire Extinguisher ......................................... 85
Automatic Speed Control ............................. 86
Cupholder ................................................... 88
Ashtray ....................................................... 89
Cigarette Lighter ......................................... 90
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........ 91
Front Luggage Compartment Lid .................. 93
Front Luggage Compartment ....................... 94
Rear Lid ..................................................... 95
Rear luggage compartment .......................... 96
Trunk Entrapment ..................................... 100
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) 101
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms ...... 103
iPod, USB and AUX .................................... 104
Roof Transport System .............................. 105
HomeLink ................................................. 106
Automatic Air Conditioning System,
Heated Rear Window/
Door Mirror Heating......................... 109
Air conditioning .........................................
Automatic Air Conditioning System .............
Central and Side Vents ..............................
Fresh-air Intake .........................................
Heated Rear Window/
Door Mirror Heating...................................
110
113
116
116
117
Instruments, On-Board Computer,
Warnings ........................................ 119
Instrument Panel USA Models ..................... 120
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................. 122
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ....... 124
Instrument Illumination ................................ 124
Trip Odometer ........................................... 125
Speedometer ............................................ 126
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers .. 126
Tachometer ............................................... 127
Turn Signal Indicator Light .......................... 127
High Beam Indicator Light ........................... 127
Gear Shift Indicator
(in vehicles with manual transmission) .......... 127
Cooling System .........................................128
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ................... 129
Fuel .......................................................... 130
Clock ........................................................ 131
Outside Temperature ................................. 131
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................. 133
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................ 134
Warnings on the instrument panel and
the on-board computer ............................... 166
Shifting Gears.................................. 175
Manual Transmission, Clutch....................... 176
Drive-Off Assistant ..................................... 177
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ................... 178
Maintenance, Car Care .................... 185
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ..........................................186
Coolant Level .............................................187
Engine Oil .................................................188
Engine Oil Level ........................................189
Engine Oil Recommendation ........................190
Brake Fluid Level ........................................192
Fuel Economy ............................................194
Operating your Porsche in other Countries ...194
Fuel Recommendations ..............................196
Portable Fuel Containers ............................197
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................ 197
Emission Control System ............................198
How Emission Control Works ......................199
Washer Fluid ..............................................200
Power Steering ...........................................201
Air Filter ....................................................201
Combination Filter ......................................201
Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission
and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .............201
Wiper Blades ............................................202
Car Care Instructions ................................203
Practical Tips, Emergency Service.... 211
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle .........................................212
Tires/Wheels ............................................213
Loading Information ...................................224
Wheel Bolts ..............................................226
Changing a wheel .......................................227
Flat Tire .....................................................229
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage Lift ........................................... 232
Spacers ................................................... 233
Electrical System ..................................... 235
Battery .................................................... 239
Replacing the remote-control battery ......... 244
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ..... 245
Bulb chart ................................................. 247
Lights, Replacing Bulbs ............................. 247
Headlights ................................................ 248
Number Plate Light .................................... 256
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and
Long-Life Bulbs ......................................... 256
Adjusting Headlights .................................. 257
Towing ..................................................... 259
Vehicle Identification,
Technical Data ................................ 263
Vehicle Identification .................................. 264
Technical Data .......................................... 266
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires ...................... 267
Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................. 268
Driving Performance .................................. 270
Capacities ................................................ 271
Weights ................................................... 272
Dimensions .............................................. 272
Diagrams ................................................. 273
Table of Contents
7
Dear Porsche Owner
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid
quality control and demanding inspections.
These engineering and safety features will be
enhanced by you...
the safe driver...
– who knows his/her car and all controls,
– who maintains the vehicle properly,
– who uses driving skills wisely and always
drives within her/his own capabilities and the
level of familiarity with the vehicle.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
perform most of the checks listed on the following
pages.
If in doubt, have these checks performed by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
Before driving off...
Check the following items first
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly.
Check tires for damage and tire wear.
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened
and not loose or missing.
f Check engine oil level, add if necessary.
Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with
every fuel filling.
f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
washer and brake fluid levels.
f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
cranks the engine properly.
f Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly.
f Check, and if necessary replace worn or
cracked wiper blades.
f See that all windows are clear and unobstructed.
f Check air intake slots and area between luggage compartment lid and windshield. Ensure
that these areas are free of snow and ice, so
the heater and the windshield wipers work
properly.
8
Before driving off...
f If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/child seat restraint system to ensure
that restraints are properly adjusted.
f Child restraint systems will not fit into the
Sports bucket seat.
Do not install a child restraint system in the
Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
with the LATCH system and thus the airbag
system cannot be manually deactivated.
f Check all exterior and interior lights for operation and that the lenses are clean.
f Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
necessary, have them adjusted.
f Check under the vehicle for leaks.
f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Emergency equipment
It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
in your vehicle.
Some of the items you should have are:
window scraper, snow brush, container or bag of
sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel, firstaid kit, etc.
In the driver’s seat...
On the road...
f Check operation of the horn.
f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol
or drugs.
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
controls.
To reduce the possibility of injury from the
airbag deployment, you should always sit back
as far from the steering wheel as is practical,
while still maintaining full vehicle control.
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
f Buckle your safety belts.
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
f Check all warning and indicator lights with
ignition on and engine not running.
f Start engine and check all warning displays for
warning symbols.
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
f Lock doors from inside, especially with children in the car to prevent inadvertent opening
of doors from inside or outside.
Drive with doors locked.
f Always have your safety belt fastened.
f Always drive defensively.
Expect the unexpected.
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
conditions warrant it.
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, depending on traffic, road and
weather conditions.
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
weather.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and reduced speeds, particularly on roads with
standing water, as the handling characteristics
of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydroplaning of the tires.
f When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the PDK selector lever to ”P“ or the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear.
On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
f When emergency repairs become necessary,
move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
emergency flasher and use other warning devices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
operate the vehicle in areas where the hot exhaust system may come in contact with dry
grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable material.
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
with every refueling.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the vehicle with engine idling.
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST” on
Page 5.
Before driving off...
9
Break in hints for the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers
f Do not participate in motor racing events,
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance from your new Porsche.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in
period which will gradually disappear.
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufacturing methods, the moving parts must still wear
in with each other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in
the first 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers.
Therefore:
f Preferably take longer trips.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
driving whenever possible.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
Neutral or in gear.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
10
Before driving off...
Break in brake pads and brake discs
New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in”,
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
New tires
New tires do not have maximum traction. They
tend to be slippery.
f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100 to
200 km. Longer braking distances must be anticipated.
Engine oil and fuel consumption
During the break-in period oil and fuel consumption may be higher than normal.
As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
the engine is operated, the climate and road conditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the lubricant.
f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
refueling, add if necessary.
1 Inner door handle, Page 18
2 Power windows, Page 27
3 Door mirror control, Page 29
4 Hands-free microphone
5 Seat memory, Page 35
6 Diagnostic socket (OBD)
7 Front and rear lid release, Page 93, 95
8 Steering-wheel adjustment, Page 38
9 Seat adjustment, Page 32
Before driving off...
11
1 Light switch, Page 78, 80
2 Ignition/starter switch, Page 72
3 Turn signal/headlight dimmer,
flasher lever, Page 81
4 Lever for on-board computer, Page 134
5 Horn
6 Lever for automatic speed control, Page 86
7 Wiper/washer lever, Page 82
8 Stopwatch, Page 144
9 Interior temperature sensor
10 Emergency flasher switch, Page 77
11 Central locking button, Page 20, 23
12 Cupholder, Page 88
13 Seat heating/ventilation left/right,
Page 37, 38
14 Operating panel for air conditioning, Page 110
15 Sport/Sport Plus program, Page 61
Rear spoiler, Page 67
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM), Page 66
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM), Page 63
Sports exhaust system, Page 55
16 Operating panel for Porsche Communication
Management (PCM), see separate operating
instructions
12
Before driving off...
Operation, Safety
Keys .......................................................... 15
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15
Doors ......................................................... 18
Central Locking in Cars without Alarm System 19
Central Locking in Cars with Alarm System ... 21
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 25
Power Windows ........................................... 27
Mirrors ........................................................ 29
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating .. 31
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 32
Seat Memory ............................................... 35
Heated Seats .............................................. 37
Seat Ventilation ............................................ 38
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 38
Steering Wheel Heating ................................ 39
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ..................... 40
Sun Visors ................................................... 41
Safety Belts ................................................. 42
Airbag Systems ........................................... 44
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 50
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat .... 53
Child Restraint Anchorage ............................ 54
Sports Exhaust System ................................ 55
Parking Brake .............................................. 55
Brakes ....................................................... 56
ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System) ... 59
Clutch Pedal ................................................ 60
Sport Mode ................................................. 61
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ............. 63
Porsche Active Suspension Management ............
(PASM) ........................................................66
Retractable Spoiler .....................................67
Fixed rear spoiler .........................................68
Interior lights ...............................................69
Parking Aids ...............................................70
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock ................................72
Starting Procedures .....................................75
Stopping Engine .........................................76
Emergency Flasher Switch ............................77
Light Switch on Vehicles
with Bi-Xenon Headlights ...............................78
Light Switch on Vehicles
with Halogen Headlights ...............................80
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /Parking light /
Flasher Lever ...............................................81
Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever ...................82
Fire Extinguisher ..........................................85
Automatic Speed Control ..............................86
Cupholder ...................................................88
Ashtray .......................................................89
Cigarette Lighter ..........................................90
Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........91
Front Luggage Compartment Lid ...................93
Front Luggage Compartment ........................94
Rear Lid ......................................................95
Rear luggage compartment ..........................96
Trunk Entrapment .....................................100
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) 101
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms .......103
iPod, USB and AUX ....................................104
Roof Transport System ...............................105
HomeLink ..................................................106
Operation, Safety
13
Never invite car theft!
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock
invites car theft.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are
standard equipment in your Porsche.
The gong alarm will sound if you open the driver’s
door while the key is still in the ignition lock. It is
your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition
lock and to lock the doors.
Warning!
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in property damage, serious personal injury or death.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
key in the ignition lock, especially if children
and/or pets are left unattended in the vehicle. They can operate power windows and
other controls. If the engine is left running,
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from loss of control of the vehicle.
f Always remove the ignition key.
f Always set the parking brake.
f Lock the doors with the remote control.
14
Operation, Safety
Warning!
Risk of a serious accident.
The steering column will lock when you remove the key while you are driving or as the
car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
steer the car.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from loss of control of the vehicle.
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
while you are driving.
To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as
follows when leaving your vehicle:
f Close windows.
f Lock glove compartment.
f Remove ignition key.
f Close storage tray between the seats.
f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, cell
phones, house keys) from the car.
f Lock doors.
Keys
Replacement keys
Immobilizer
f Please see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM, PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING” on
Page 25.
Replacement car keys can be obtained only from
your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can
sometimes be very time-consuming.
You should therefore always keep a spare key on
your person.
Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but under no
circumstances in or on the vehicle.
There is a transponder (an electronic component)
in the key grip, containing a stored code.
When the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the engine started only using an authorized ignition key.
Two car keys are supplied with your Porsche.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle.
The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche
dealer.
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with
them except under exceptional circumstances.
A total of 6 car keys can be reported to the control
unit.
f To avoid battery run-down, always remove the
ignition key from the ignition lock.
Disabling key codes
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN
CARS WITHOUT ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 19.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN
CARS WITH ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 21.
Emergency operation
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERATION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 74.
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by
an authorized Porsche dealer.
All the remaining car keys are required for this purpose.
Disabling the code ensures that the car can be
started only using authorized keys.
Note
f Please note that the other locks can still be
opened with the disabled key.
Switching off the immobilizer
If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
without the engine being started, the immobilizer
is switched on again.
f If this happens, turn the ignition key back to
position 3 (ignition off) before starting the
engine. The immobilizer is switched off again,
and the engine can be started.
f Please see the chapter “IGNITION/STARTER
SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT STEERING LOCK”
on Page 72.
Switching on the immobilizer
f Remove ignition key.
Security Wheel Bolts
f If wheels have to be removed during a workshop visit, do not forget to hand over the socket for the security wheel bolts along with the
car key.
Operation, Safety
15
Key with Radio Remote Control
Unlocking the vehicle
f Press button 1.
Locking the vehicle
f Press button 1.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered accidentally
f Press button 1.
Unlocking front luggage compartment lid
f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
Unlocking rear lid
f Press button 3 for approx. two seconds.
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultaneously with the luggage compartment.
In vehicles with seat memory the stored seat and
door mirror positions are automatically set.
The vehicle will be locked again approx.
80 seconds after the luggage compartment is
closed if none of the doors was opened.
Note
1234-
Central locking button
Front luggage compartment lid button
Rear lid button
Light-emitting diode
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program further types of unlocking.
Type 1
The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted to
suit your individual requirements:
10 - 100 seconds.
Type 2
The doors stay locked when the luggage compartment is unlocked.
16
Operation, Safety
Malfunction of the remote control
The remote control may not function correctly due
to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will
then not lock properly.
This can be identified by the missing locking
sound and the missing check-back signal of the
emergency flasher.
If this should occur:
f Lock the vehicle with the key in the door.
The remote-control standby function
switches off after 7 days
Operational readiness of the remote
control interrupted
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the remote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to prevent discharging of the vehicle battery).
Encoded data is transmitted to the vehicle each
time the wireless remote control is operated. If the
remote control is operated too often outside the
range of the vehicle, this can result in the central
locking system no longer responding.
In this case, the remote control and vehicle must
be synchronized.
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again and
the alarm system is switched off.
Carrying out the synchronization
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key at the
door lock.
2. Open driver’s door and insert the ignition key
into the ignition lock within 10 seconds to
prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.
3. With the key inserted, press and hold button 1
on the remote control for approx. 5 seconds.
The synchronization is now complete.
Operation, Safety
17
Door storage tray
Opening storage tray
f Open the cover C.
Keep the door storage tray C closed while driving
for safety reasons.
Doors
Opening unlocked doors from inside
If the door windows are closed, they will be automatically opened by a few millimeters when the
doors are opened and, when the doors are closed,
they will be closed again. This makes it easier to
open and close the doors and protects the seals.
f Slowly pull door handle B.
f Therefore, you should pull the door handle
slowly so that the door window can be lowered
before the door is opened.
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING CONDITIONS” on Page 22.
Opening doors from outside
f Unlock vehicle with the remote control.
f Slowly pull door handle A.
18
Operation, Safety
Opening locked doors from inside
f Slowly pull door handle B twice.
Central Locking in Cars without
Alarm System
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by Porsche could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 35.
Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
Any person remaining in the locked car can
open the door with the inner door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Automatic relocking
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
of the car doors is opened within approx.
100 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
This relocking time can be adapted to your individual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Emergency operation – opening
f Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the
door lock.
Emergency operation – closing
f Lock the driver’s door with the key at the door
lock.
If there is a defect in the central locking
system, all functioning elements of the central
locking system will be locked.
The fault should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Indication by emergency flasher
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher:
– Unlocking – single flash.
– Locking – double flash.
Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Operation, Safety
19
Locking
f Press the rocker-switch.
Indicator light in the rocker switch lights up if
ignition is on.
If the doors were locked with the central
locking switch, they can be opened by pulling
the inner door handle twice.
Unlocking
f Press the rocker-switch.
Indicator light goes off.
Central locking switch
Type 3
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
running, they lock again automatically when a
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
Type 4
The doors do not lock automatically.
Note
Automatic door locking
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
the inside door handle twice.
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
diverse types of automatic door locking in the
control unit of the central locking system.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
locking.
Type 1
The central locking switch on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on.
Note
Type 2
If the doors are locked with the key or remote
control, they can not be opened by pressing the
central locking switch.
Doors lock automatically when a speed of
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Warning!
In an emergency situation where you need to
exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
open the door.
f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
locking button or
f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
20
Operation, Safety
Central Locking in Cars with Alarm
System
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 35.
Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
A short signal from the alarm horn will draw
your attention to the fact that the following
components are not completely closed when you
try to lock the vehicle:
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
– Driver’s door (The vehicle cannot be locked if
the driver’s door is not completely closed)
Note
– Luggage compartment lids
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
– Passenger’s door
Note
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
locking.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Automatic relocking
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
of the car doors is opened within approx.
100 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
This relocking time can be adapted to your individual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an authorized Porsche dealer.
– Glove compartment
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
lock and opening the door may activate the alarm
system within 10 seconds.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Porsche could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.
Operation, Safety
21
Locking conditions
Emergency operation – opening
Emergency operation – closing
f Lock car once.
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
Alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring are switched on.
f Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the
door lock.
Open door within 20 seconds and insert the
ignition key into the ignition lock within
10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from
being triggered.
f Lock the driver’s door with the key at the door
lock.
If there is a defect in the central locking
system, all functioning elements of the central
locking system will be locked.
The alarm system is switched on.
The passenger compartment monitoring
system is switched off.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle:
f Quickly lock car twice:
The doors cannot be opened from the outside.
The passenger compartment monitoring is
switched off.
Unlocking the door with the inner door
handle
Any person remaining in the locked car can open
the door with the inner door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
22
Operation, Safety
Note on operation
If the door is not opened within approx.
20 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
The alarm system will be triggered by the next
unlocking of the door:
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock to
switch off the alarm system.
The fault should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Indication by emergency flasher and
alarm horn
Locking
f Press the rocker-switch.
Indicator light lights up if ignition is on.
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher:
Unlocking
f Press the rocker-switch.
Indicator light goes out.
– Unlocking – single flash.
– Locking – double flash.
If the doors were locked with the central locking
switch, they can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle:
– Locking twice – continuous illumination for
approx. 2 seconds. The passenger compartment monitoring is switched off.
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Central locking switch
The central locking switch on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
Note
If the doors are locked with the key or remote
control, they can not be opened by pressing the
central locking switch.
Operation, Safety
23
Automatic door locking
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
diverse types of automatic door locking in the
control unit of the central locking system.
Type 1
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on.
Type 2
Doors lock automatically when a speed of
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
Type 3
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
running, they lock again automatically when a
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
Type 4
The doors do not lock automatically.
24
Operation, Safety
Note
Fault indication
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
the inside door handle twice.
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
locking.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Warning!
In an emergency situation where you need to
exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
open the door.
f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
locking button or
f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Overload protection
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Porsche could void the user’s authority
to operate this equipment.
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system
Alarm System,
Passenger Compartment
Monitoring
This device complies with:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched on when the
doors are locked with the key or remote control.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN
CARS WITH ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 21.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered accidentally
f Unlock the vehicle with the remote control by
pressing button 1.
The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched off automatically
when the doors are unlocked.
Function indication
If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does not
flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double flashes, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
and passenger compartment monitoring system
are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
off.
Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
door lock and opening the door may activate
the alarm system within 10 seconds.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Operation, Safety
25
When the alarm is armed, the following
areas are monitored
– Doors
– Front and rear lids
– Glove compartment
– Passenger compartment
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes.
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and
the passenger compartment light lightes for approximately five minutes.
When the alarm is triggered, the light-emitting
diode changes over to double flashes.
In order not to limit the action range of the passenger compartment monitoring system:
f Do not fold the seat backrests forward.
26
Operation, Safety
Deactivating the passenger compartment
monitoring system for one locking
process
Fault indication
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
system must be switched off.
f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
f Quickly lock car twice.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
the inside:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system.
f Remove the ignition key to shut off power to
the window switches when the vehicle is not
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed
persons could injure themselves by operating
the power windows.
f In case of danger, release the button on the
car key immediately.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Risk of an accident.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows
that may interfere with the driver’s vision.
Readiness for operation of power windows
A - Power window in driver’s door
B - Power window in passenger’s door
Power Windows
Warning!
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
This applies especially if the windows are
closed with the one-touch operation, because with this function the window goes up
automatically.
– When the ignition is switched on
(engine switched on or off) or
– with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
but only until door is first opened.
One-touch operation for closing the door
windows is available only when the ignition is
switched on.
Opening/closing windows
The two rocker switches A and B in the driver’s
door and the switch in the passenger’s door have
a two-stage function:
Opening
f Press the rocker switch down to the first stage
until the window has reached the desired
position.
Closing
f Press the rocker switch upwards to the first
stage until the window has reached the desired
position.
One-touch operation
f Press the rocker switch upwards or
downwards to the second stage.
Window moves to its final position.
Press again to stop the window in the desired
position.
One-touch operation for closing the passenger’s
window is available once the window is approximately half-way closed.
f Make sure that fingers, hands, arms or other
parts are not in the way when the windows are
closed.
Operation, Safety
27
Anti-crushing protection
If a side window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by about an inch.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injuries.
If the rocker switch is pressed again within
10 seconds of the window being blocked, the
window will close with its full closing force.
Anti-crushing protection is disabled.
f Once the anti-crushing protection acts to stop
the window and opens it slightly, do not press
the rocker switch again within 10 seconds
without checking to make sure that nothing is
blocking the path of the window.
The window will close with full closing force.
One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds
after blockage of a side window.
28
Operation, Safety
Automatic window lowering
f Please see the chapter “DOORS” on Page 18.
Storing end position of the windows
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected,
the windows will not be raised automatically when
the door is closed.
1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
once.
2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to store
the end position of the windows in the control
unit.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the driver’s
vision.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
f Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash.
Adjusting door mirrors
1. Switch on ignition.
Mirrors
Door mirrors
Inside mirror
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and
inside mirrors.
It is important for safe driving that you have clear,
unobstructed vision to the rear.
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare
lever A must point forward.
Basic position: lever forward
Anti-glare position: lever back
2. By turning the control switch A, select the driver’s side or the passenger’s side.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropriate direction by tilting the control switch.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Adjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
Automatically swivelling down mirror on
the passenger’s side
f Please see the chapter “PARKING AIDS” on
Page 70.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 35.
Operation, Safety
29
Folding in door mirrors
Warning!
Danger of injury to fingers if the mirror
accidentally flips back when being folded in.
f Exercise extreme caution when folding in mirror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror before
the locking lever is locked or the mirror is fully
unfolded.
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force).
2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and
slowly let go of the mirror.
Unfolding door mirrors
1. Push mirror towards the door window and
continue to hold it (high spring force). The
locking lever disengages automatically.
2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by hand.
Do not let go of the mirror beforehand.
30
Operation, Safety
A - Sensor
B - Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
C - Light-emitting diode
Automatic Anti-Glare Interior
Mirror and Door Mirror
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light.
The mirrors automatically change to anti-glare position or revert to their normal state, depending on
the light intensity.
When reverse gear is selected, automatic antiglare operation is switched off.
Note
Switching on
The incident light in the area of the sensors must
not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the windshield.
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off the automatic anti-glare
operation
f Press switch B.
Light-emitting diode C goes out.
Switching off
Switching on the automatic anti-glare
operation
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
f Press switch B.
Light-emitting diode C lights up.
Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge
from a broken mirror glass.
This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Rear Window Defogger,
Door Mirror Heating
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
ignition is on.
Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather and
plastic parts. Electrolyte fluid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
f Clean the affected parts with water.
Operation, Safety
31
Seat Adjustment and Head
Restraints
Warning!
The seat may move unexpectedly if you
attempt to adjust while driving. This could
cause sudden loss of control, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in motion.
The backrest locks must be engaged at all
times while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
positioned on the body.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety
belts worn by passengers in an excessively
reclined position can cause serious personal
injury or death in an accident.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or
passenger backrests excessively reclined
(see “Seat position”).
Risk of injury if persons or animals are in the
movement range of the seat during seat
adjustment.
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk.
32
Operation, Safety
Caution!
Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, etc.
when the seat is adjusted or folded back or
forward.
f Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not
in contact with any other object.
The driver and passenger seats provide
integrated head restraints in the backrests. The
head restraints are not adjustable.
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the
head restraints and backrests, respectively, are
placed in their proper positions so that the risk of
neck injuries is minimized in the event of a crash.
For proper positioning of the head restraint, the
seatback's inclination should be adjusted such
that the head restraint is in an upright position.
Driver and passenger should be seated upright
and in the center of their seats.
Seat position
An ergonomically correct sitting position is
important for safe and fatigue-free driving.
We recommend the following procedure for adjusting the driver’s seat to suit individual
requirements:
1. Vehicles with manual transmission:
Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal fully
depressed, your leg remains at a slight angle.
Vehicles with Porsche Doppelkupplung
(PDK):
Adjust the seat until, with your left foot on the
footrest, your left leg remains at a slight angle.
2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
wheel.
Set the backrest angle (not applicable for
Sports bucket seat) and the steering-wheel
position so that your wrist rests on the outer
rim of the steering wheel. At the same time,
the shoulders must still be in noticeable
contact with the backrest.
3. Adjust the seat height (not applicable for
Sports bucket seat) to give yourself enough
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
4. Electrically adjustable seat:
Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest
lightly on the seat cushion.
E Lumbar support
(pelvis and spinal column support)
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest
curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and
spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
is reached.
F Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
f Push forward or pull backward switch F until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
Standard seat/sports seat
A Seat height
f Use lever A in a pumping movement:
Upwards – seat moves upwards
Downwards – seat moves downwards
B Fore and aft
f Raise locking lever B.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
C Backrest angle
f Operate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.
Comfort seat with driver seat memory/
Adaptive sports seat with driver seat
memory
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
A Seat height adjustment
B Fore-and-aft position adjustment
C Seat angle adjustment
D Backrest angle adjustment
G Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
f Push forward or pull backward switch G until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
Seat backrest
Folding forward
f Pull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
and fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
Operation, Safety
33
B Backrest
Folding forward
f Pull loop B in the side part of the backrest and
fold the backrest forward.
Folding back
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
Sports bucket seat
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
A Fore and aft adjustment
f Raise locking lever A.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
34
Operation, Safety
Warning!
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
a seat setting.
The seat position can only be called up when the
vehicle is stationary.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of the seat adjustment buttons.
1. Switch on the ignition or
open the driver’s door.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
2. Press person button until the seat has reached
its final position.
The setting of door mirrors and lumbar
support will be completed even if the person
button is not kept depressed.
Operation with person buttons 2, 3
Storing seat position
1. Switch on ignition.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
M - Memory button
1 - Key button
2, 3 - Person buttons
Seat Memory
Recalling seat position
Note
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately by releasing the button.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press person button 2 or 3 until an audible
signal confirms that the position has been
stored.
The individual setting is now stored under the
desired person button.
Individual seat and door mirror settings can be
stored and recalled for the driver’s position.
You cannot store the position of the side bolsters
of the adaptive sports seat.
Further individual setting options are available in
vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
f Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Operation, Safety
35
Operating with the remote control of the
vehicle key
Each remote control (up to six) can be assigned an
individual seat and door mirror position.
The stored seat and door mirror position is set automatically when the vehicle is unlocked using the
corresponding remote control.
Storing individual lowered position of the
passenger’s door mirror as a parking aid
Once the driver's seat setting has been stored, an
individual lowered position of the passenger's
door mirror may be stored for driving in reverse:
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
Storing seat position
3. Engage reverse gear.
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
Reverse gear must not be engaged.
4. Select passenger side with mirror switch.
The passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions.
5. Set passenger’s door mirror to desired final
position.
3. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press key button 1 until an audible signal
confirms that the position has been stored.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
It is necessary to wait for at least 15 seconds
between locking and unlocking the door.
6. Keep memory button M depressed and also
press key button 1 until an audible signal
confirms that the position has been stored.
The individual setting is now assigned to this
remote control and to the key button.
Recalling seat position
f Unlock the locked vehicle or the luggage
compartment with the remote control.
The stored seat position is automatically set.
The seat position assigned to a remote control
can also be recalled with the key button 1 if the
corresponding key was used to switch on the
ignition.
If no seat position has been assigned to a remote
control, the key button will not work.
Note on operation
Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
immediately:
f by switching on the ignition,
f by pressing the central locking button,
f by pressing any memory or seat adjustment
button.
Clearing the stored seat position
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
2. Press memory button twice and key button 1
once consecutively.
36
Operation, Safety
Switching on
High heating power
f Press button once.
Both yellow light-emitting diodes in the button
light up.
Low heating power
f Press button twice.
One yellow light-emitting diode in the button
lights up.
Switching off
f Press button as often as necessary until the
light-emitting diodes go out.
A - Seat heating, left
B - Seat heating, right
Heated Seats
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation
when the engine is running.
The yellow light-emitting diodes in the button show
witch stage is currently activated.
Operation, Safety
37
Seat Ventilation
The three-stage seat ventilation is ready for operation when the engine is running and from an
ambient cabin temperature of 58 °F (15 °C).
The three stages are controlled with the buttons
on the control panel for the air conditioning.
The blue light-emitting diodes in the buttons show
which stage is currently activated.
Note
The full effect of the seat ventilation can be
achieved only if you are wearing breathable
clothing.
Seat ventilation and seat heating can be used at
the same time and provide excellent seating
comfort when used in the right combination.
f Do not use protective seat covers.
Switching on seat ventilation
High ventilation
A - Seat ventilation, left
B - Seat ventilation, right
Low ventilation
f Press button three times.
One light-emitting diode lights up.
f Press button once.
Three light-emitting diodes light up.
Switching off seat ventilation
Medium ventilation
f Press button as often as necessary until all
light-emitting diodes go out.
f Press button twice.
Two light-emitting diodes light up.
38
Operation, Safety
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident.
The steering wheel may move further than
desired if you attempt to adjust it when
driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle, causing
serious personal injury or death.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Adjusting steering wheel height and
longitudinal direction
Switching on steering wheel heating
f Press button.
The message “Steering wheel heating ON”
is displayed on the on-board computer for
2 seconds.
1. Insert ignition key fully into ignition lock.
2. Push the locking lever downwards.
3. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally.
Switching off steering wheel heating
f Press button.
The message “Steering wheel heating OFF”
is displayed on the on-board computer for
2 seconds.
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it engage.
If necessary, move steering wheel slightly longitudinally.
Steering Wheel Heating
The steering wheel heating can be switched on
and off with the button on the rear of the steering
wheel when the ignition is switched on.
Operation, Safety
39
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel
Operating the function keys
f Please read the separate PCM operating
instructions before operating the function
keys.
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio,
navigation system, telephone or other
equipment when driving.
Operating these devices while driving could
distract you from traffic and cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
The rotary knobs at the top left and right of the
steering wheel can also be pressed.
Turn volume control
Upwards – increase volume.
Downwards – decrease volume.
Press volume control
To switch volume/mute on and off.
f Operate these components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only while the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you
can use the function keys of the multi-functional
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche
communication systems:
– PCM
– Telephone
– Radio with CD-Drive
– CD-Audio
Readiness for operation of multifunctional steering wheel
The multi-functional steering wheel is ready for
operation when the ignition and PCM are switched
on.
Turn rotary knob
To select/mark function in the PCM within
a menu. To do this, turn the rotary knob
upward or downward.
Press rotary knob
To activate selected function.
Press screen button
To call the stored PCM function.
The button can be assigned the desired
function in the PCM.
Press Back button
To move back in the PCM menu.
Press Handset Pickup button
To accept a telphone call.
Press Handset Hangup button
To end or refuse a telephone call.
40
Operation, Safety
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.
Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident or risk of damage to mirror lid.
f Keep the lid closed while driving.
Risk of damage.
f Do not force the lid beyond its end position.
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on automatically when the cover is opened (arrow).
Sun Visors
f Swing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.
Operation, Safety
41
Safety Belts
Warning!
Always make sure your and your passenger’s
safety belts are properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion.
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may result in serious personal injury or death.
f For your and your passenger’s protection, use
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
small children.
Proper wearing of safety belts
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
can cause serious personal injury or death in
case of an accident.
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt
should be worn low across the hips.
f Pregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it
is not pressing against the abdomen.
42
Operation, Safety
f Belts should not be worn twisted.
f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eye glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause injury.
f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere
with proper positioning of belts.
f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
damage may occur to the belt.
f Two occupants should never share the same
belt at the same time.
Care and maintenance
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
may prevent a secure locking.
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
stretch forces in an accident must be inspected or replaced to ensure their continued effectiveness in restraining you.
The same applies to belt tensioner systems
which have been triggered.
In addition, the anchor points of the belts
should be checked.
f If safety belts do not work properly, see your
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
to ensure safe operation.
f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
in your vehicle.
f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
Please see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUCTIONS” on Page 203.
f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
are completely dry after cleaning or this may
cause damage to the belt.
Belt tensioner
Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
safety belts are tightened in an accident.
The belt tensioners are triggered in:
– Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
severity.
Note
The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
once; the system must be replaced afterward.
If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
airbag warning light lights up.
Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner system only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Inertia reel retractor
The combination lap/shoulder belt with inertia reel
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt
is slow.
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a collision locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you
drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve,
otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit your
upper body movement.
Fastening the safety belt
f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT POSITION” on
Page 32.
Safety Belt Warning System
An audio-visual warning system is interconnected with the driver’s safety belt.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
passenger to buckle up.
In addition, the gong will sound for approx. 90 seconds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph/24 km/h.
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
as the driver has buckled up.
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
worn behind your back or under your arm.
f Grasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous
slow motion across your chest and lap.
Releasing the safety belt
f Push in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
tongue will spring out of buckle.
f To release a latched belt, lean back to take the
body pressure off the belt.
f To store lap/shoulder belt, allow the belt to retract as you guide the latch to its stowed position.
f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 52.
Cleaning the safety belts
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you
can use any mild washing agent. Allow the belts to
dry prior to retracting, but avoid direct sunlight.
f Only use suitable cleaners. If unsuitable
cleaners are used or any attempt is made to
dye or bleach the belts, the webbing may be
weakened and thus constitute a safety risk.
f Insert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
an audible click. Pull the belt to check.
f Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
snugly across the pelvis.
f Belts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.
Operation, Safety
43
Airbag Systems
The airbags in combination with the safety belts
make up a safety system which offers the driver
and the passenger the greatest known protection
from injuries in case of accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing system for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the
safety belts must be worn at all times,
because the front airbag system is only deployed
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient
severity.
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag system, and during types of collisions which do not
cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts
provide the primary protection to the occupants
when correctly worn.
Therefore, all persons within the vehicle
must wear safety belts at all times (in many
states, state law requires the use of safety belts).
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” on
Page 42.
The front airbags are located under the padded
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on
the passenger's side, in the dashboard.
The side airbags are installed on the side in the
seat backrests.
The head airbags are installed in the door linings.
44
Operation, Safety
Danger!
To provide optimal occupant protection, airbags must inflate at very high speed. If you
are not wearing your safety belt or are too
close to the airbag when it is deployed, inflating airbags can result in serious personal injury or death.
f Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the driver or passenger and the
area into which the airbag inflates.
f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
vehicle control.
f Always keep the lid of the door storage compartment closed. Objects must not protrude
out of the door storage compartment.
f No changes may be made to the wiring or
components of the airbag system.
f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
to the steering wheel or in the area of the passenger airbag, side airbags and head airbags.
Doing so may adversely affect the functioning
of the airbag system or cause harm to the occupants if the airbag system should deploy.
Do not use protective seat covers.
f Always fasten seat belts because triggering
of the airbag system depends on the force and
angle of impact.
f Do not modify the seat coverings. Do not attach additional cushions, protective coverings,
or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do not affix
things to the passenger's seat or cover it with
other materials. Do not cover the back of the
backrest. Do not make changes to the passenger's seat and to the seat base frame.
f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of
the passenger’s seat. These could impair the
function of the airbag, the seat belts, and
weight sensing.
f Do not undertake any wiring for electrical accessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the airbag system or cause inadvertent inflation.
f Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat
hangers) over the backrest.
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag system should be repaired immediately by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer
rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel.
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is moving.
f Using accessories not approved by Porsche
can cause the weight sensing system to be impaired.
f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extinguisher, or first aid kit under the seat.
f Only have seats removed and installed by an
authorized Porsche dealer so that weight sensing components will not be damaged.
f Give your passenger all of the information in
this chapter.
Note
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door lining, seats) may be disassembled only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety
instructions must be followed. These instructions
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer.
Function of the airbag system
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your
primary protection comes from your safety belts.
The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
collision of sufficient force and direction.
In the event of a side impact of corresponding
force, the side airbag on the impact side is
triggered.
The inflation process generates the amount of gas
required to fill the airbags at the necessary pressure in fractions of a second.
Airbags help to protect the head and upper body,
while simultaneously damping the motion of the
driver and passenger in the impact direction in the
event of a frontal impact or side impact.
In order to help provide protection in severe collisions which can cause death and serious injury,
airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high
speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable
side effect, which is that it can and does cause injuries, including facial and arm abrasions, bruising
and broken bones. You can help minimize such injuries by always wearing your safety belts.
There are many types of accidents in which airbags are not expected to deploy. These include
accidents where the airbags would provide no benefit, such as a rear impact against your vehicle.
Other accidents where the airbags are designed
not to deploy are those where the risk of injury
from the airbag deployment could exceed any protective benefits, such as in low speed accidents or
higher speed accidents where the vehicle decelerates over a long time. Since airbag deployment
does not occur in all accidents, this further emphasizes the need for you and your passenger to
always wear safety belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module. This module will record the
use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
and passenger when the airbags and/or belt tensioner work.
Advanced Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing system for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automatically be switched on and off.
Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
passenger's airbag which is activated will be triggered during a collision.
Precondition for switching the passenger's airbag
on and off, depending on weight:
– Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
deactivation device:
Switch position AUTO.
– Ignition key is inserted.
Improper handling of the weight sensing
system can unintentionally impair switching
the passenger's airbag off and on.
Operation, Safety
45
Seat adjustment for the passenger's seat
Danger!
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
positioned on the body. Improperly positioned safety belts can cause serious personal
injury or death in an accident.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or passenger backrest excessively reclined.
f Porsche recommends the use of L.A.T.C.H.
(Lower Ancorage and Tether for Children)
equipped Porsche child seat.
Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the backrest is in contact with the engine compartment
wall), the backrest can warp. Warping of the backrest can lead to malfunctions.
f Correct the seat adjustment.
Ensure that the seat is not jammed and is selfsupporting.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright position.
46
Operation, Safety
f Do not transport a load and objects behind and
under the passenger's seat.
If the load or objects are under the seat, it can
cause malfunctions.
If the weight on the passenger's seat is reduced
significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the
armrest, the passenger's airbag can be switched
off.
f Select an upright seat position, and do not support weight on the armrests or lean out of the
window.
Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is moving.
If the passenger's seat is warped significantly, a
message is displayed on the on-board computer:
f Correct the seat adjustment.
Automatic deactivation of the passenger’s
airbags
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the passenger seat can result in serious personal
injury or death to the child from an airbag
deployment.
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
f Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
seat:
Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 166.
– When an up to one-year old child is seated
in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
automatically deactivated on the passenger
side.
Vehicle modifications to accommodate
persons with disabilities
– When an adult is seated in the front seat the
front airbag remains active on the passenger‘s
side.
Because modifications to your vehicle could compromise your advanced airbag system, please call
1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle modified.
The condition of the passenger’s front airbag is
shown by the indicator lamp.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
If in doubt:
– The passenger's airbag is active and ready for
operation.
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
f Please see the chapter “LATCH SYSTEM
CHILD SEAT BRACKET ON THE PASSENGER’S
SEAT” on Page 53.
Note
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Note on operation
Although not desired, it can occur in the case of
heavier children that the passenger’s airbag
remains active or, in the case of very light adults
or young persons, that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
f After inserting the ignition key, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights up for a
few seconds as a bulb check.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up
– The passenger's airbag is switched off.
– If the passenger's seat is not occupied, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
also not light up, even though the passenger's
airbag is switched off.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger airbag triggering unintentionally.
When the ignition key is inserted and the up
to one-year old child is seated in the child restraint system on the passenger’s seat, the
indicator lamp ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“
must be on.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactivation device: Switch to position OFF.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag deactivation device: Do not drive.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety
47
Airbag maintenance
Note
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted.
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning light and warning
message
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instrument panel and a message on the on-board computer.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 166.
f In the following cases you should immediately consult an authorized Porsche
dealer in order to assure the airbag system is functioning properly:
– If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition key is inserted or
– If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
– If the warning light appears while driving.
48
Operation, Safety
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the airbag system must be inspected by an authorized
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
your Maintenance Booklet.
Important information
If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
Owner's Manual (safety and disposal rules).
Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints:
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Warning light ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“
If the airbag on the passenger’s side is switched
off:
– Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” is
continuously lit when the ignition key is
inserted.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death from
the passenger’s airbag.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ warning
light is not lit when the ignition key is inserted
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched to the
OFF-Position, this could indicate a fault in the
system.
Key-operated airbag deactivation device
In case your vehicle is equipped with LATCH, you
can switch off (OFF) the passenger’s front airbag
manually. In the automatic mode (AUTO), the airbag will be switched on or off automatically depending on the weight on the passenger seat.
f Switch off the passenger’s airbag on the key
switch using the vehicle key.
A Switch position AUTO – passenger’s front
airbag is active
B Switch position OFF – passenger’s front airbag
is switched off
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death for
passenger if passenger’s airbag remains
switched off after the child restraint system
is removed.
f Make sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.
f Do not install a child restraint system on the
passenger’s seat.
f Have the fault remedied immediately.
Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted (not on vehicles with Sports bucket
seats).
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety
49
Child Restraint Systems
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with
applicable laws.
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCHsystem recommended by Porsche. These systems have been tested and adjusted to the interior
of your Porsche and the appropriate child weight
groups. Other systems have not been tested and
could entail an increased risk of injury or death.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always see the separate installation
instructions for your child seat.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian
provinces. The child restraint system should be
one that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap
belt or lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt or for
child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem (Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc-
50
Operation, Safety
tion manual provided with the restraint.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the passenger seat can result in serious personal injury or death to the child from an airbag
deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Note
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child.
f Follow all child restraint instructions and
warnings in this manual.
– When using an infant or child restraint system,
be sure to follow all manufacturer's instructions on installation and use.
– Infants and small children should never be held
on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
with another occupant while the vehicle is in
motion.
– Children too big for child restraint systems
should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
can be used providing it does not cross the
face or the neck of the child.
– Choose a child restraint system according to
the weight of the child.
– Child restraint systems that are damaged or
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
be replaced immediately.
– Children could be endangered in a crash if their
child restrains are not properly secured in the
vehicle.
– Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
cover it with other materials.
– Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to
advise you about the installation possibility for
a Porsche child restraint system which allows
a key-operated airbag deactivation of the passenger’s airbag.
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
Child restraint system for up to one-year old
children
f The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is
in its lower rear position.
– Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up.
– The key-operated airbag deactivation device
installation requires special programming
available only from your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Using child restraint systems in the
passenger seat
f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
Direction of installation for child restraint
systems
Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs (13 kg)
Children of this weight must be transported in a
restraint system which is installed on the passenger’s seat facing rearward.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
Danger!
The use of a child restraint system in the passenger seat can result in serious personal
injury or death to the child from an airbag
deployment.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
Group I: Children between 20 lbs (9 kg) and
40 lbs
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg)
and 55 lbs (25 kg)
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
– Adjust the passenger's seat as far away from
the airbag as possible.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger airbag triggering unintentionally.
When the ignition is on and the up to oneyear old child is seated in the child restraint
system on the passenger seat the indicator
lamp ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ must be on.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
fault in the system.
In this case:
f Do not use a child restraint system on the passenger’s seat.
f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactivation device: Switch to position OFF.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag
deactivation device: Do not drive.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg)
and 80 lbs (36 kg)
Operation, Safety
51
Child restraint system for children older than
one year
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing system for the passenger's seat in accordance with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight acting on the passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automatically be switched on or off.
Small adult passengers
Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
to the passenger airbag not triggering.
When the ignition key is inserted on and the
small adult passenger is seated on the passenger’s seat, the indicator lamp ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ must be off.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator
lamp lights up, it could indicate a fault in the
system.
In this case:
f Do not carry a passenger in the passenger’s
seat.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
52
Operation, Safety
Automatic locking retractor
Activating the automatic locking retractor
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
The safety belt for the passenger is equipped with
an automatic locking retractor for securing the
child restraint system. When activated, this retractor allows you to securely fasten the child restraint
system in place so that inadvertent movements
will not occur.
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
Before transporting a child on the passenger seat:
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
child, when excessive force is acting on the
passenger's seat due to the seat belt.
In such cases, the passenger's airbag can be
switched on unintentionally.
f After fastening the child restraint system, do
not adjust the seat.
f Check the condition of the passenger’s airbag
shown by the indicator lamp in the central console.
2. Fasten child seat.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of it
to retract.
Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.
Releasing the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully retracted. At this point the automatic locking feature
will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
of a Porsche child restraint system.
f
LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s
seat
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children system (LATCH).
These systems have been tested and adjusted to
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
child weight groups. Other systems have not been
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always see the separate installation instructions for your child seat.
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Installing a LATCH child seat system
1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as outlined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
Note
f Make sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.
Operation, Safety
53
Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the passenger’s seat, the anchor point must be
used for anchoring the top tether.
Warning!
The child restraint anchorage is designed to
withstand only the load imposed by a correctly fitted child restraint.
Under no circumstances is the anchorage to
be used for adult safety belt or harness. Such
use could result in serious personal injury or
death.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorage.
This is not designed to withstand a load
imposed by an adult.
Child Restraint Anchorage
f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 52.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system..
If your child restraint seat requires the use of a
tether strap, you will want to use the anchor point
behind the passenger’s seat under the carpet.
f To ensure proper installation, see your authorized Porsche dealer.
54
Operation, Safety
Setting the parking brake
f Pull the lever all the way up (arrow).
With the ignition on, the parking brake warning
lights in the instrument panel and on-board
computer will come on if the lever is even
slightly raised. A firm pull upward is required to
properly engage the parking brake.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
f Move the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear
(Manual transmission).
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not
moving at all.
Sports Exhaust System
Switching on and off
The sports exhaust system can be switched on
and off when the ignition is switched on using the
button.
When the sports exhaust system is switched on,
the light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Parking Brake
Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to
the rear wheels by means of cables.
f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle
has come to a full stop.
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
partially engaged parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
injury or death to any person in its path.
f Engage the parking brake fully.
Releasing the parking brake
f Pull the lever slightly up as you depress the release button, and then push the lever all the
way down.
Operation, Safety
55
Parking brake warning light USA
Parking brake warning light
Canada
The warning lights in the instrument panel and onboard computer will go out after the parking brake
is fully released.
The warning lights are not an indicator that the
parking brake is fully set; it is only intended to be
a warning to release the parking brake before
driving the car.
Caution!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and
cause excessive wear.
f Release the parking brake fully.
f When parking your car, always set the parking
brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
f Move the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear
(Manual transmission).
f On hills also turn the front wheels towards the
curb.
56
Operation, Safety
Brakes
Brake system function
f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
brakes before driving.
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
brakes at the front and rear.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
circuit operates the front and the other operates
the rear.
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or
100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four
times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire traction is also less effective when the roads are wet
or slippery.
f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
from the car in front of you.
Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)
Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to corrode if your car is parked for an extended period.
The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result.
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion depend on the amount of time the vehicle was
parked, whether granular or liquid road salt was
spread and whether grease-dissolving agents
were used in car washes.
To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, ”brake
them dry“ before parking the car.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
recommend having the brake system checked by
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still operate. However, you will notice an increased pedal
travel when you apply the brakes.
Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping
distance to increase.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of
one brake circuit:
f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
that position.
A mechanical linkage activates the second circuit, and you will be able to bring the vehicle to
a stop.
f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
towed to the nearest authorized Porsche dealer for repair.
Brake system warning light
You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to
the "On" position and verifying that the warning
light illuminates.
Brake warning light USA
Brake pedal
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could
increase the stopping distance.
Brake warning light Canada
f Always check the movement of the brake pedal
before driving and make sure that it is not obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and onboard computer go on while driving, the brake fluid level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal travel
has increased) one of the two brake circuits may
have failed.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
A greater braking pressure will be required, stopping distances will be longer and the braking behavior will change, particularly in curves.
Note
With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly
working brake system, the pedal travel to the
point of brake actuation should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. or 30 to 40 mm.
Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this distance, have the brake system checked.
Warning!
To avoid overheating and premature wear of
the brakes:
f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
gear or driving position to control speed.
f Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on
the pedal when not intending to apply brake
pressure.
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too
often.
This could cause the brakes to get hot and not
function properly.
f Please see the chapter “DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT” on Page 177.
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, increased pedal travel is required to bring your
vehicle to a full stop.
Operation, Safety
57
Brake booster
Brake wear
Brake pads and brake discs
The brake booster assists braking only when
the engine is running.
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear depends on how the brakes are used.
Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the conditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
in actual miles on the road.
When the car is moving while the engine is not running, or if the brake booster is defective, more
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
the car to a stop.
If this happens, ABS and PSM will also not operate.
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking.
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applications.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Driving through water may reduce the traction.
Moisture on brakes from road water, car
wash, or coating of road salt may affect
braking efficiency.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after exposure to road water, etc.
58
Operation, Safety
f Have the brake system inspected at the
intervals recommended in your Maintenance
Booklet.
Brake system warning light
You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to
the "On" position and verifying that the warning
light illuminates.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and onboard computer stay on when the engine is running or come on while driving, the brake pads are
worn excessively.
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.
The high-performance brake system is designed
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
therefore might cause “brake noises”.
New brake pads or linings
New brake pads and brake discs have to be “broken in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction
when the car has covered several hundred miles
or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be compensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
brake discs are replaced.
ABS Brake System
(Antilock Brake System)
The ABS system represents a major contribution
to the enhancement of active safety in your vehicle. This system prevents the wheels from locking
in a panic stop on almost all road surfaces.
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the
following areas are enhanced:
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all
braking forces when ABS is engaged.
Good directional control, no swerving caused
by locking of wheels under braking conditions.
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances
are usually reduced because controlled braking is
maximized.
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake- induced
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from emergency braking.
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over a
conventional brake system is in the area of maintaining directional control and maneuverability of
the car in emergency situations.
Warning!
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
f Obey all traffic laws.
Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS
system may not be able to maintain control,
especially on wet or poor road surfaces and
thus may be more likely to impact you from
behind.
f To minimize that risk, use your ABS system to
increase your ability to maneuver to avoid dangerous situations and not merely to try to stop
in the shortest distance possible.
Operation of the ABS system
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during braking, the brake pressure is adjusted automatically
until the wheel no longer slips.
If braking forces approach the wheel lock-up point
for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system will
intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking. The
proper operation of ABS is perceived by the driver
as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction with audible noise and perhaps some vibration.
f If you experience these sensations while driving or a road surface with questionable traction, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for the
prevailing road conditions.
f If full braking should be necessary, press the
brake pedal all the way down throughout the
entire braking procedure, regardless of the pulsating pedal. Do not ease up on pressure applied to the pedal.
The functional readiness of all the main electrical
components of the ABS is checked by an
electronic monitoring system both before and
while you drive.
Operation, Safety
59
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning
light will light up while the system is electronically
interrogated and goes out when the engine is
started if the check is not yet complete.
If the ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this indicates that ABS has been deactivated due to a
fault. If the warning lights in the instrument panel
and on-board computer light up while you are driving, this indicates that a fault has occurred. In both
cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without ABS,
is still retained.
The ABS system should, however, be examined at
an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to prevent the occurrence of further faults.
f If the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
immediately.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
The control unit of the ABS brake system is
set for standard tire size. If non-standard
tires are installed, the control unit may misinterpret the speed of the vehicle, because of
the variant data it receives from the sensors
on the axles.
f Use only tire makes and types tested by
Porsche.
Clutch Pedal
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Always check the movement of the clutch pedal before driving and make sure that it is not
obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmission:
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears.
f Do not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.
Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly
become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
clutch.
f See your Porsche dealer for correction.
60
Operation, Safety
Sport Mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
is switched on. Interventions by the Porsche
control systems are intentionally shifted towards
greater agility and driving performance:
– PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management) is automatically changed to Sport mode,
resulting in a stiffer suspension setup.
– When Sport mode is active, the PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear-changing map
and shortens the gear shifting times. Gear
changes take place faster, but fuel consumption is also increased.
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control
gives a sportier road-feel to the vehicle. PSM
interventions take place later than in Normal
mode. The driver can maneuver the vehicle
with greater agility at its performance limits,
without having to dispense with the assistance
of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to
achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race
circuits with a dry road surface.
– The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched
on, this function is activated only after the
driver has floored the accelerator pedal or
released it briefly.
– The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”, i.e.
the engine is immediately throttled when the
performance limits are reached (only in manual
selection mode for vehicles with PDK transmission).
f Please observe the chapters on PSM, PASM
and PDK.
Switching Sport mode on and off
Switching Sport mode on and off simultaneously
activates and deactivates the Sport mode in
PASM.
If PASM Sport mode was activated with the PASM
button, PASM remains active.
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
SPORT button
f Press SPORT button A in the center console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the lightemitting diode in the SPORT button is lit.
A sporty gear-changing map is enabled and the
gear shifting times are shortened for the PDK
transmission.
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
Downshifts are made during slight decelerations,
even at higher engine speeds.
f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE
(“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on
Page 180.
SPORT PLUS button
(only on vehicles with PDK transmission)
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
changes to a shift program designed for driving
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
The gear-changing performance is enhanced
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode.
f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE
(“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on
Page 180.
f Press SPORT PLUS button B in the center
console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the lightemitting diode in the SPORT PLUS button is lit.
Operation, Safety
61
When mode “Sport” is switched on, the logo
SPORT appears next to the digital speedometer.
62
Operation, Safety
When mode “Sport Plus” is switched on, the logo
SPORT PLUS appears next to the digital
speedometer.
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM)
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of
the vehicle approaching the performance limits of
driving maneuvers.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
physics cannot be overcome, even with PSM.
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
speed cannot be reduced, even by PSM.
The driver bears the responsibility for all
driving maneuvers.
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
f Obey all traffic laws.
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
and engine continuously measure:
PSM uses these values to determine the direction
of travel indicated by the driver.
PSM intervenes and helps to correct the course if
the actual direction of motion deviates from the
chosen course (steering-wheel position):
It brakes individual wheels as needed. In addition,
the engine power may be manipulated in order to
stabilize the vehicle.
The events below inform the driver of PSM control
operations and warn him/her to adapt his/her
driving style to the road conditions:
– The multifunctional information light on the
instrument panel flashes.
– Hydraulic noises can be heard.
– The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
forces are altered as the PSM controls the
brakes.
– Reduced engine power.
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
changed during braking.
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
foot pressure must be increased after the
brake pedal has begun vibrating.
Examples of PSM control operations
– If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, the rear wheel on the inside of the bend
is braked and the engine power is reduced if
necessary.
– If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.
Additional braking functions
– Pre-filling the brake system:
The brake system is prepared for possible
subsequent emergency braking if the accelerator pedal is released suddenly and quickly.
The brake system is prefilled and the brake
pads are already applied gently to the brake
discs.
– Brake booster:
In the event of an emergency braking operation
where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
booster provides the braking pressure necessary for maximum deceleration at all 4 wheels.
– Speed
Advantages of PSM
– Direction of travel (steering angle)
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces
with varying friction.
– Lateral acceleration
– Rate of turn about the vertical axis
– Longitudinal acceleration
Operation, Safety
63
– The system compensates for undesired lateral
vehicle reactions when the driver releases the
accelerator pedal or brakes when cornering.
This compensation functions up to the
maximum lateral acceleration.
The following functions stabilize the vehicle in
emergency situations, even with PSM switched
off:
– When PSM is off, the vehicle is stabilized as
soon as one of the two front wheels enters the
ABS control range.
– PSM actively stabilizes the vehicle as required
during dynamic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid
steering movements, during lane changes or
on alternating bends).
– When PSM is off and Sport mode is on, the
vehicle is stabilized as soon as both front
wheels enter the ABS control range.
– Improved braking stability on bends and on
different or varying road surfaces.
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
even with PSM switched off.
– It improves braking function and shortens
stopping distance in the event of emergency
braking.
Switching PSM back on
Readiness for operation
PSM is switched on automatically every time you
start the engine.
Switching off PSM
– On a loose surface or in deep snow,
f Press PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched off after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up.
When the PSM is switched off, the PSM multifunctional light on the instrument panel is lit
and a message is shown on the on-board
computer.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
– When “rocking” the vehicle free and
Note
– When using snow chains.
When PSM is switched off, the additional braking
functions are deactivated. Automatic reactivation
in emergency situations is linked to the PSM
control.
PSM should always be switched on during
“normal” driving.
However, it may be advantageous to switch off
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations, for
example:
64
Operation, Safety
f Press PSM OFF button.
PSM is switched on after a short delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button and the
PSM multifunctional light on the instrument
panel go out.
The on-board computer shows a message.
Sport mode
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport or
Sport Plus mode is switched on.
PSM interventions are later than in Normal mode;
the vehicle can be maneuverd with greater agility
at its performance limits, without dispensing with
the assistance of PSM in emergency situations.
This helps to achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race circuits and a dry road surface.
PSM multifunctional light
– The multifunctional light on the instrument
panel lights up for a lamp check when the
ignition is switched on.
– The light indicates a control operation by
flashing, including when PSM is switched off
(brake control in the event of one-sided wheel
spin).
– In conjunction with a message on the on-board
computer, the light indicates that PSM is
switched off.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
f Please have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on Page 241.
Towing
f Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 259.
Checks on test stands
Brake tests
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
test stands or roller test stands.
The ignition must be switched off.
The following limit values must not be exceeded
on roller test stands:
– Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
– Test duration 20 seconds
Handbrake tests
Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
performed only with the ignition switched off.
– The light indicates a fault in conjunction with a
message on the on-board computer.
PSM is out of order.
Operation, Safety
65
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM)
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to
the driver: “Normal” and “Sport”.
The selection is made via a button on the center
console.
In Normal mode the running gear is in a comfortable setup.
Sport mode offers very sporty shock absorber
tuning.
The variable suspension system selects the appropriate damping level for each wheel according to
the situation and driving conditions.
Example:
If the vehicle is driven in a very sporty manner in
Normal mode, PASM automatically adapts the
shock-absorber behavior to the driving situation
accordingly.
Switching on PASM Sport mode
f Press PASM button in the center console.
When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is lit up and a
message is shown on the on-board computer.
Switching off PASM Sport mode
f Press PASM button in the center console.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out
and the on-board computer displays a
message.
After the ignition is switched off, PASM is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
66
Operation, Safety
Rear Spoiler
The rear spoiler improves driving stability, especially at higher speeds.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
If the spoiler cannot be extended, driving stability will be adversely affected by increased
rear axle lift, which could lead to loss of control.
f Adapt your driving style and speed to the
changed driving conditions.
f Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Automatic control
(automatic mode)
Manual control
(manual mode)
The rear spoiler extends at approx. 75 mph
(120 km/h) and retracts again at approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h).
When the ignition is on, the rear spoiler can be
extended and retracted manually using the button
in the center console.
If the automatic control fails, the warning light
lights up.
Note
Warning light
When the rear spoiler is extended manually, the automatic control does not operate and the rear
spoiler must be manually retracted.
The warning light in the on-board computer lights
up when the rear spoiler does not extend over
75 mph (120 km/h) or its end position is not
reached.
Risk of injury during manual retraction or
extension of the spoiler with the vehicle
stationary.
f Make sure that no persons or objects are
within the range of movement of the rear
spoiler.
Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by
the rear spoiler.
f Do not push the vehicle at the rear spoiler.
Operation, Safety
67
f at speeds between 20 and 60 mph
(30 and 100 km/h):
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler retracts, the light-emitting
diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
f at speeds over 60 mph (100 km/h):
Press button briefly.
The rear spoiler remains extended, the lightemitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
Manually retracting an extended rear spoiler
after switching on the ignition again
Extending
f Press button briefly.
The spoiler extends to its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The rear spoiler remains extended even after
switching off ignition.
Retracting
f at speeds between 0 and 20 mph
(0 and 30 km/h):
Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
reached its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
68
Operation, Safety
1. Press button briefly.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The rear spoiler is now in manual mode.
2. Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
reached its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
Fixed rear spoiler
Caution!
Risk of damage to rear spoiler.
f Please consult the operator before using automatic car washes.
f Do not push the vehicle by the spoiler.
Switching on lights
f Switch position 1.
Switching on driver’s side:
Interior lights on driver’s side, footwell and
luggage compartment lights on.
Switching on passenger’s side:
Reading light on passenger’s side on.
Switching off lights
f Switch position 2.
Orientation light
The light-emitting diode in the interior light improves your orientation inside the vehicle when it is
dark.
Note on operation
On vehicles with Sport Chrono Package Plus, the
brightness of the orientation light can be changed
in PCM.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Switching off driver’s side:
Interior lights on driver’s side, footwell and
luggage compartment lights off.
A - Switch for interior, footwell and luggage compartment
lights
B - Orientation light
C - Reading light
Interior lights
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
Switching off passenger’s side:
Reading light on passenger’s side off.
Switching lights on and off automatically
f Switch position 0.
Lights are switched on when a door or rear lid
is unlocked or opened or when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the ignition lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of approx. 2 minutes after the door is closed.
The lights go out immediately as soon as the ignition key is inserted in the ignition lock or the vehicle is locked.
Operation, Safety
69
Parking Aids
Note
Parking assistant
The sensors must always be kept free of dirt, ice
and snow in order to ensure that they are fully
functional.
When the driver backs up, the parking assistant
system indicates the distance between the car
and a large obstacle behind it, by means of signal
tones.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the sensors:
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Parking assistant cannot detect small objects such as children and pets.
Despite use of the parking assistant system,
the driver is still responsible for taking due
care and assessing obstacles when backing
up.
f Make sure that no persons, especially small
children, animals or obstacles are within the
maneuvering area.
The parking assistant system is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.
Note
Be aware that the parking assistant system is
not switched on if the car rolls backward without
reverse gear being engaged.
70
Operation, Safety
Signal tones/function
Ultrasound sensors
Sensors
Four ultrasound sensors in the rear bumper measure the distance to the closest obstacle.
– Range middle sensors around 60 in./150 cm
– Range outer sensors around 24 in./60 cm
Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind” sensor area (e.g. near the ground).
When reverse gear is selected, the parking
assistant confirms that it is switched on by issuing
a short signal tone.
A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermittent tone. The intervals decrease as the obstacle
is approached.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance
becomes less than one foot. This continuous tone
can stop if the obstacle is approached closer than
one foot.
The radio volume should not be so loud as to
drown out the signal tones.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Preconditions
The parking assistant system cannot detect:
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
– sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. powder
snow),
– Set the control switch A to “passenger’s side”.
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
– sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfaces, flat painted surfaces)
Returning mirror glass to its original position
f Drive forwards with a speed of over 4 mph
(6 km/h) or
– and very thin obstacles.
– Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic
brakes of other vehicles, jackhammers) can
interfere with detection of obstacles.
f Set the control switch A to “driver’s side”.
Fault indication
The parking assistant system indicates a fault in
two ways:
– After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone of the same pitch:
This indicates that sensors are soiled or covered with ice.
– After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous
tone with a much lower pitch:
This indicates a general system fault.
Please have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
A - Control switch for door mirror adjustment
Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking
aid
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 35.
– When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passenger’s side swivels down
slightly to show the curb area.
Operation, Safety
71
f Please see the chapter “KEY WITH RADIO REMOTE CONTROL” on Page 16.
Switch position 1
Before starting the engine
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
Ignition is switched on.
f Apply the footbrake.
f Manual transmission:
Fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gearshift lever into neutral.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
f In vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.
Switch position 0
O - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off
Ignition/Starter Switch with
anti-theft Steering Lock
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock positions.
The ignition key rebounds to the initial position
from every ignition lock position.
f For your safety, fasten safety belts.
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on
Page 15.
72
Operation, Safety
Initial position
The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
To withdraw the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
f In vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P.
f Switch ignition off.
f Remove ignition key.
Ignition on
Note on operation
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 166.
Switch position 2
Locking the steering column
Automatic unlocking
Start engine
Automatic locking
The steering column is unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked with the radio remote control.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
f Please see the chapter “STARTING PROCEDURES” on Page 75.
Switch position 3
Ignition off
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
The steering column is automatically locked when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
The steering wheel will lock and will cause
loss of steering.
Note on operation
f Never remove key from the ignition lock or turn
the key off while the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
f Always withdraw the ignition key when
leaving the vehicle.
Note
f To avoid discharging the battery, always remove the ignition key from the ignition lock.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 239.
Gong
If you leave the key in the ignition/steering lock, a
gong will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
This is a reminder to remove the key.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed:
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERATION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 74.
Operation, Safety
73
Emergency operation – pulling out the
ignition key
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can be pulled
out only if the emergency operation is performed.
1. Grasp the fuse box cover at the finger hole and
pull it off.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the cover.
74
Operation, Safety
3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic lid B
from the ignition lock. Make sure that plastic lid
B is not lost.
4. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise as far as it
will go.
5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
An unlocking sound will be heard.
6. Turn the ignition key to initial position (0) and
remove.
7. Re-fit the plastic lid B.
Starting Procedures
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on
Page 15.
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 198.
Warning!
Serious injury or death may result if you are
involved in a collision without having fastened the safety belts.
f Fasten safety belts before driving away.
Before starting the engine
f Apply the footbrake.
f Manual transmission:
Fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gearshift lever into neutral.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
f In vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N.
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically
provide the correct fuel/air mixture required for
starting.
Therefore, it is not necessary to depress the
accelerator pedal while starting a cold or a
warm engine.
Starting the engine
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
f As soon as the engine starts, release the ignition key.
The first operation of the starter is ended automatically when the engine starts.
If the engine does not start, subsequent starter
operations will not be ended automatically.
If the engine fails to start after 10 or 15 seconds
of cranking:
f Wait about 10 seconds before engaging the
starter again.
f When starting the engine, be ready to drive
immediately.
Drive vehicle at moderate speeds and avoid
engine speeds above 4,200 rpm during the
first 5 minutes.
f Do not let the engine idle to warm up.
Danger!
Engine exhaust fumes have many components which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an
enclosed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for
prolonged periods with the engine on and the
car not moving.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
is potentially hazardous.
If warning lights should come on to indicate
improper operation, they would go unnoticed.
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable material.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Risk of burn injury when standing near or
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
supervise children around the vehicle when the
exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
Operation, Safety
75
Stopping Engine
f Turn key back to position 3.
f Do not stop engine immediately after hard or
extended driving.
Keep engine running at increased idle for
about two minutes to prevent excessive heat
build-up before turning off engine.
f To avoid discharging the battery, always remove the ignition key from the ignition lock.
f When leaving the car, always remove the ignition key, apply the parking brake and engage
1st gear or reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the selector lever to
position P on vehicles with PDK transmission.
f Engage the steering lock by moving the steering wheel to the left or right.
Turn the steering wheel to the locking position
before you switch off the engine so that you
don’t have to exert yourself when locking or
unlocking the steering.
Warning!
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
76
Operation, Safety
Risk of burn injury when standing near or
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
turned off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
supervise children around the vehicle when the
exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in the
engine compartment.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the enginecompartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on temperature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the engine switched off.
Automatic garage door
The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
with your electronically operated garage door.
f To check this, drive your Porsche close to the
garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
the operating range of the door.
f Run the engine at different speeds.
f If the garage door opens or closes without you
operating the garage door unit in your car,
contact the dealer who installed the automatic
garage door to have the frequency and/or
coding of the garage door signal changed or
modified.
Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency repairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approaching from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.
Emergency Flasher Switch
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn signal lever position.
f If your car is disabled or parked under emergency conditions switch on the emergency
flasher in the dashboard.
All turn signals and the indicator light in the
switch flash with the same frequency.
Hot engine compartment components can
burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
Operation, Safety
77
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumination, daytime driving lights switched off
Canada: daytime driving lights switched
on
Low beam, high beam
Only with ignition on,
daytime driving lights switched off
Rear fog light
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light on.
Warning chime
Light Switch on Vehicles with
Bi-Xenon Headlights
Lights switched off
Daytime driving lights are switched on
when the engine is running.
Welcome Home Function
Daytime driving lights are switched on
when the engine is running.
78
Operation, Safety
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the Welcome Home
lighting) are on, a chime warns of possible battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.
Daytime driving lights
The daytime driving lights are integrated in the
front auxiliary headlights. These lights are
switched on only when the engine is running and
with the light switch in the positions OFF or HOME.
Low beam headlights must be switched on when
driving through tunnels or at dusk, for example.
Operation of the daytime driving lights may vary
depending on country-specific regulations.
Canada only:
In addition to the auxiliary headlights the parking
lights are switched on.
USA only:
The daytime driving lights can be deactivated in
the on-board computer.
f Please see the chapter “ON-BOARD
COMPUTER (BC)” on Page 134.
Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus
Further individual light functions are available in vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
f Please observe the chapter “Individual Memory” in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Cornering light
The dynamic cornering light is activated above
speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment
Welcome Home Lighting
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
dynamic headlight beam adjustment.
Switching on
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
headlight beam automatically changes in accordance with the vehicle load.
The level of the headlight beam is automatically
kept constant during acceleration and braking.
Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load.
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam
adjustment system must be checked by an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Move light switch to the HOME position.
For improved visibility and security when you get
in and out of the car, the daytime driving lights and
the tail lights remain on for a certain period of
time:
– When you get out of the car, the lights are
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay
time. This setting also changes the lighting
period for unlocking the vehicle.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
– The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.
Operation, Safety
79
Fog light in addition to parking lights or
low beam
Pull switch to first click.
Indicator light on.
f Please see the chapter “ON-BOARD
COMPUTER (BC)” on Page 134.
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light on.
Welcome Home Lighting
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the Welcome Home
lighting) are on, a chime warns of possible battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.
Lights switched off
Welcome Home Function
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumination
Low beam, high beam
Only with ignition on
80
Operation, Safety
USA only:
The daytime driving lights can be activated/deactivated in the on-board computer.
Rear fog light in addition to fog lights
Warning chime
Light Switch on Vehicles with
Halogen Headlights
Daytime driving lights
Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus
Further individual light functions are available in vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
f Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Switching on
f Move light switch to the HOME position.
For improved visibility and security when you get
in and out of the car, the fog lights and the tail
lights remain on for a certain period of time:
– When you get out of the car, the lights are
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay
time. This setting also changes the lighting
period for unlocking the vehicle.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
– The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.
The turn signal lever turns off automatically when
the steering wheel is straightened out after completing a turn.
Individual Light Functions
Lane changer
f Please refer to the chapter ”Individual Memory“
in the separate PCM operating instructions.
f To indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point.
The lever will return to the OFF position when
released.
Further individual light functions are available in
vehicles with Sport Chrono Plus package.
f If the frequency of the display becomes noticeably faster, check the operation of the turn signal bulbs.
Headlight flasher
Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Parking light / Flasher Lever
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready
for operation when the ignition is on.
1 – Turn signal left
2 – Turn signal right
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure
point – turn signals flash three times
3 – High beam
4 – Headlight flasher
Lever in center position – Low beam
When high beam and headlight flasher are selected, the blue indicator light in the tachometer is lit.
(With ignition on or off)
f To flash the headlights to oncomming motorists, slightly pull the lever toward the steering
wheel and then release it.
The blue indicator light in the tachometer will
go on/off as you pull/release the lever.
Parking light
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off.
f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
Operation, Safety
81
Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever
4 – Windshield wiper – one-touch operation:
f Move wiper lever downwards. The windshield
wipers wipe once.
Warning!
5 – Windshield wipers and washer system:
f Pull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
The washer system sprays and wipes while the
lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
wipes are executed.
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers
operate unintentionally, e.g. in intermittent
or rain sensor operation.
Risk of damage to the windshield, wiper system and headlight washer.
f Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry
windshield to prevent scratching the glass.
Spray washer fluid on the windshield first.
A scratched windshield will reduce visibility.
A - Headlight washer (Vehicles with Bi-Xenon
headlights):
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
beam is switched on.
f Always loosen wiper blades from frozen glass
before operating wipers to prevent damage to
the wiper motor or blades.
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(intermittent or sensor operation).
f Briefly push button A to operate headlight
washer system.
Wiper and headlight washer system
f Do not operate the headlight washer in car
washes.
0 – Windshield wipers off
1 – Intermittent/rain sensor operation for
front windshield wipers
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Please see the chapter “RAIN SENSOR” on
Page 83.
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
2 – Windshield wipers slow
f Move wiper lever upwards to the second click.
f Always switch off windshield wipers before
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
operation (intermittent or sensor operation).
3 – Windshield wipers fast
f Move wiper lever upwards to the third click.
82
Operation, Safety
f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
The headlight washer system automatically sprays
once for every ten times the front windshield
washer system is operated.
Note
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
freezing.
Rain sensor
In vehicles with a rain sensor the amount of rainfall
(snowfall too) which has settled on the windshield
is measured. Wiper speed is automatically adjusted accordingly.
Switching on
Switching off
Maintenance note
To switch the rain sensor on again:
Decreasing intervals
f Adjust switch A upwards.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
Increasing intervals
f Adjust switch A downwards.
f Adjust switch A upwards –
high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
f Adjust switch A downwards –
low sensitivity.
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is
switched on.
On vehicles without a rain sensor, the wiping
intervals can be adjusted in four steps.
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
f Move wiper lever to position 0.
Wipe interval control
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor
f Move wiper lever to position 0 and then to
position 1 or
f Operate windshield washer system 5 or
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with
four-stage switch A.
Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the windshield.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
further rain sensor functions can be selected via
the PCM.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with a window cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash. We recommend
Porsche window cleaner. If they are very dirty
(e.g. with insect remains), they can be cleaned
with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
a result of the following:
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
wax residues may be adhering to the windshield.
These wax residues can only be removed by using
a window cleaner concentrate.
f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 200.
f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
f Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.
Operation, Safety
83
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, further rear wiper functions can be selected via the PCM.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
Rear wiper
6 – Rear window wiper - intermittent operation:
f Move wiper lever forwards to the first click.
The rear window wiper wipes at preset intervals.
The rear wiper is automatically switched off when
a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h) is exceeded.
It is switched on again when the speed falls below
118 mph (190 km/h).
84
Operation, Safety
Note
f Pay attention to the final control date on the
fire extinguisher.
If the fire extinguisher is used after its expiration date has elapsed, it may not operate
properly.
f Follow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.
Fire Extinguisher
Inserting fire extinguisher
In cars equipped with a fire extinguisher, the extinguisher is fitted to the front of the driver’s seat.
1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
Taking out fire extinguisher
2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
jack and close tension jack (arrow).
1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with
the other hand (arrow).
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.
Operation, Safety
85
Vehicles with PDK
Hold and store speed
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the
pre-selected speed (especially when driving downhill).
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the
accelerator.
Warning!
Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death. A constant speed may
not be safe in heavy traffic, or on winding or
slippery roads.
With the speed control system engaged, the
engine speed will not return to idle when removing the foot from the accelerator pedal.
f Do not use the speed control when it may be
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed.
A1234-
Automatic speed control readiness off/on
+SPEED/SET (accelerate/store)
–SPEED (decelerate)
OFF (interrupt)
RESUME
Automatic Speed Control
The automatic speed control maintains any
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph
(30 km/h and 240 km/h) without you having to
use the accelerator pedal.
The automatic speed control is operated with the
lever on the steering wheel.
86
Operation, Safety
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
Switch automatic speed control
readiness on
f Press button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
This green indicator light in the
speedometer now indicates readiness
f Then briefly push the operating lever forward
(position 1).
Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
Option 1
f Increase the speed as usual with the
accelerator.
When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is set again.
Option 2
f Push operating lever forward (position 1) until
the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 3
f Push lever slightly forwards (position 1)
(a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
each time the lever is pushed forwards.
Note on operation
Speed control operation is automatically interrupted if the speed is increased by more than approx.
16 mph (25 km/h ) for longer than 20 seconds.
Decelerating
Option 1
f Pull operating lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) until the desired speed is reached.
The speed reached is maintained and stored
when the lever is released.
Option 2
f Briefly move lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) (a maximum of 10 times).
The speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
each time the lever is moved towards the
steering wheel.
Vehicles with PDK
Downshifts are carried out to improve deceleration (especially when driving downhill).
Interrupting automatic speed control
operation
f Pull operating lever downwards briefly
(position 3) or
f Operate brake or clutch pedal or
f Switch PDK to selector lever position N.
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPELKUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 178.
The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory.
Automatic speed control operation is
interrupted automatically:
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds.
– If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx.
37 mph (60 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 60 seconds (upward slopes).
– For PSM control operations.
Resuming the stored speed
f Briefly push operating lever upwards
(position 4).
The speed control accelerates/decelerates
the vehicle to the stored speed.
The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Switching automatic speed control
readiness off
f Press button A on the automatic speed control
lever.
The green readiness light in the speedometer
goes off.
Note
The stored speed value is cleared when the
vehicle is parked and the ignition is switched off.
Important note
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, a lower gear needs to be
selected.
Operation, Safety
87
The cupholder extends
out.Cupholder
(holder for drink cans and cups)
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.
Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
f Only use beverage containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never place hot drinks in the cupholder.
Extending cupholder
f Press the panel.
The panel opens.
f Press the symbol for the respective cupholder.
The cupholder extends out.
f Close panel in the middle.
The cupholder diameter can be increased by pulling it out to hold larger containers.
88
Operation, Safety
Emptying
f Open ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert.
f Leave ashtray lid open.
Push in ash insert.
Warning!
Danger of fire.
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.
Pulling cupholder out
f Pull out holder (arrow).
f Insert container.
f Carefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.
Ashtray
Opening
f Open ashtray lid.
Closing cupholder
f Push cupholder drawer in.
f Open panel in the middle.
f Close and engage the cupholder.
f Close panel in the middle.
Operation, Safety
89
Heating lighter
f Open ashtray lid.
f Push in knob of the cigarette lighter.
When ready for use, the lighter will snap back.
Note on operation
The lighter receptacle is not to be used for
electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
compressor).
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 235.
Danger!
Danger of fire in engine compartment due to
burning cigars or cigarettes.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from fire in the engine compartment.
f Do not throw any lit cigars or cigarettes out of
the vehicle.
They can be blown into the air inlets A by the
air flow and cause a fire in the engine compartment.
90
Operation, Safety
Cigarette Lighter
Warning!
Danger of fire and burning.
The cigarette lighter is ready for use, regardless of the ignition lock position.
f Never leave unsupervised children in the car.
f Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
f Hold the lighter by the knob only.
Storage in the Passenger
Compartment
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in the
storage trays.
f Do not carry unsecured luggage or objects in
the passenger compartment.
Additional storage possibilities
– in the doors,
– in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,
– in the center console,
– storage tray with coin holder between seats,
– glove compartment with CD and pen holder,
– clothes hook on back of seat backrests
(depending on vehicle equipment),
Storage tray between the seats
Opening
f Press release button and lift the lid.
There is a coin holder in the forward part of the
storage tray.
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 235.
– side storage compartments behind the seats.
Operation, Safety
91
Glove compartment
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in
case of an accident.
f Keep the glove compartment closed while
driving.
Opening
f Pull the catch and open the lid.
Locking
f Lock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access.
92
Operation, Safety
CD holder
Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.
Opening drawers
f Push the button of the drawer you wish to
open.
Closing drawers
f Fold up CD drawer and close until it engages.
Side storage compartments behind the
seats
Warning!
Danger of injury during braking, rapid direction changes or in an accident.
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
passenger compartment unsecured.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in the oddments tray.
Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.
Opening
f Lift lid on the handhold.
Important Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the front luggage compartment lid can be opened only by connecting an external electrical power source.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLOCKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID” on Page 238.
or the description inside the fuse box lid.
Warning message
A warning message in the on-board computer
comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
f Fully close the lid.
A - Opening front luggage compartment lid
B - Opening rear luggage compartment lid
Front Luggage Compartment Lid
Unlocking the lid
f Operate pull-button A next to the driver’s seat
or corresponding button of the remote control.
When the lid is open, the luggage compartment is lit.
Opening front luggage compartment lid
Caution!
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
or windshield wipers.
f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not
folded out forwards when opening the lid.
f Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch
with the red lever (arrow).
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
f Please see the chapter “KEYS” on Page 15.
Operation, Safety
93
Closing front and rear luggage
compartment lid
f Lower the lid and close it.
f Push the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock.
Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
Front Luggage Compartment
Access covers A and B
Caution!
Risk of injury or damage.
f Do not store any objects behind the access
covers A and B.
Tool box
Opening
f Unlock turn-locks C.
94
Operation, Safety
EFGHI -
Adapter for security wheel bolts
Tire filling compressor
Towing hook
Tool kit
Tire sealant
f Open tool box and place it on the floor of the
luggage compartment.
Closing
f Insert tool box into the guide pegs in the luggage compartment floor.
f Close tool box and lock the turn-locks C.
Opening the rear lid
Caution!
Risk of damage to the paint on the rear lid if
this touches the load transported on the roof
rack when opening.
f Only open the rear lid if this cannot touch the
load.
The rear lid can be held open in 2 positions.
The luggage compartment is illuminated when the
respective lid is open.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
f Position 1: Raise rear lid up to pressure point.
A - Opening front luggage compartment lid
B - Opening rear luggage compartment lid
Rear Lid
Releasing the rear lid
f Operate pull-button B next to the driver’s seat
or corresponding button of the remote control.
f Position 2: Raise rear lid beyond the pressure
point.
Closing the rear lid
f Pull down the rear lid on the handle and allow it
to fall into the lock.
Check that the rear lid has correctly engaged
in the lock.
Warning message
A warning message in the on-board computer
comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
f Fully close the lid.
Operation, Safety
95
A - Topping up engine oil
B - Checking coolant level or topping up
Rear luggage compartment
Service flap
f Press catch button on the service flap and
open flap.
Luggage net, tie-down rings
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
passenger compartment unsecured. Secure
load against sliding.
f Do not transport heavy objects under the luggage net.
96
Operation, Safety
f Hang the luggage net on the 4 tie-down rings
around the engine cover or in the rear luggage
compartment.
Cargo partition
Warning!
2. Lift the cargo partition somewhat from the luggage compartment and disengage on both sides from the upper hooks B and hold.
3. Put cargo partition at an angle and lift out from
the lower mounts A.
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
passenger compartment unsecured. Secure
load against sliding using the cargo partition.
Removing the cargo partition
1. Turn both turn-locks to ”Lock open“ from the
passenger compartment.
Operation, Safety
97
3. Fold the cargo partition forward carefully (do
not press down with force) and lay it on the carpet.
Make sure that the partition does not slip out
of the lower mounts.
4. Turn both turn-locks to ”Lock closed“ on the
cargo partition.
Installing cargo partition
Folding cargo partition forward
1. Turn both turn-locks to ”Lock open“ on the
cargo partition.
The luggage net must be disengaged before folding the cargo partition forward.
2. Engage opened locks in the lower mounts A.
1. Turn both turn-locks to ”Lock open“ on the
cargo partition.
3. Lift cargo partition somewhat and engage in
the upper hooks B on both sides.
4. Turn both turn-locks to ”Lock closed“ on the
cargo partition.
98
Operation, Safety
2. Lift the cargo partition somewhat and disengage on both sides from the upper hooks B
and hold.
Luggage cover
The luggage cover protects luggage in the rear
storage area from direct sunlight and curious
eyes.
Caution!
Risk of damage to luggage cover from
sharp-edged or sliding pieces of luggage.
f Always remove luggage cover when pieces of
luggage can damage the luggage cover.
Removing the luggage cover
f Hold luggage cover with one hand and loosen
both turn-locks. Remove the luggage cover
using both hands.
Installing the luggage cover
f Place luggage cover into the mountings with
both hands, hold it with one hand and lock both
turn-locks.
Operation, Safety
99
Note
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on handle A.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.
Warning message
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Close the lid.
f Close the lid.
Front luggage compartment
Function with vehicle stationary
Trunk Entrapment
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking handle A, the lid can be opened from the
inside immediately.
A person trapped in the front luggage compartment can release the lid from the inside using
unlocking handle A.
The handle A is fluorescent and glows in the dark.
Function with vehicle in motion
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking handle A when a speed of 2 mph
(3 km/h) is exceeded, the warning message in the
on-board computer lights up.
At the same time, the lid is unlocked and the latch
striker pops into the catch-hook position.
100
Operation, Safety
Risk of accident.
If the warning message in the on-board computer lights up when the vehicle is in motion,
the lid may impact in front of the windshield
and can tear off.
You can lose control of the vehicle, and
serious personal injury or death may result.
A warning message in the on-board computer
lights up when unlocking handle A is operated.
f Check the luggage compartment.
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal front trunk
release mechanism.
Danger!
f Check the luggage compartment.
Note
f The front lid cannot be opened from the inside
if the battery is disconnected or empty.
Safety reasons therefore require that you
unscrew the latch striker of the front lid
lock if you plan to put the vehicle out of
operation for an extended period.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
They will advise you about the necessary
measures.
Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)
f Refer to the separate operating instructions
before putting the PCM into operation.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
operate the on-board computer, radio, navigation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
The reception conditions for the radio module
integrated in the PCM change continuously as you
drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and the
weather is unavoidable.
FM stereo reception is particularly susceptible to
varying reception conditions.
Accessories which have not been tested and
approved by Porsche may impair radio function
and reception.
Navigation
When put into operation for the first time, a
distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to
complete the process of fine calibration.
The same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
summer/snow tires) or new tires fitted.
Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during
the fine-calibration process.
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
train), the system may take a few minutes to determine the current location after it has been
switched on.
Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
system is operational again.
Car Audio Operation/Tips
For radio operation see your radio manual
which is included with your on-board literature.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 236.
FM reception
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
are constantly changing.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
other vehicles are all working against good reception.
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
problems when they are not.
The following characteristics are completely normal for a given reception area, and they do not indicate any problem with the radio itself.
Note
Electronic accessories should only be installed by
your authorized Porsche dealer.
Equipment which has not been tested and approved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Operation, Safety
101
Fading and drifting
Station swapping
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km),
except for some high power stations.
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
an electronic dead spot, such as static or multipath area, interrupts the original signal, sometimes the stronger second signal will be selected
automatically until the original one returns.
This swapping can also occur as you drive away
from the selected station and approach another
station of a stronger signal.
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired station’s transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/
or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selection of a stronger signal.
Static and fluttering
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or mountains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
FM.
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjusting the tone control for greater bass response until the disturbance has passed.
Multipath
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM,
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
out.
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter
or loss of reception.
102
Operation, Safety
Compact disc player
Caution!
To avoid damage to compact disc player and
discs.
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown, having no dirt, damage or warpage.
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
of the player unit.
Do not insert any object other than a disc into
the slot.
Remember there are no user-serviceable parts
inside the compact disc player.
f Do not allow the disc to sustain any fingerprints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
This may cause poor sound quality.
Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.
f When not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
sunlight.
Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
can damage the disc.
f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
the surfaces from the center to the outside in
a radial direction with a soft cloth.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti-static record preservative.
Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.
Car Telephone and
Aftermarket Alarms
It is essential to observe the telephone
manufacturer's instructions before operating
the telephone.
Important legal and safety information
regarding the use of cellular telephones
Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
accordance with the technical requirements of
Porsche.
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the
areas where you drive.
Danger!
Risk of an accident.
Severe personal injury or death can result in
the event of an accident.
Looking away from the road or turning your
attention away from your driving can cause
an accident and serious or fatal injury.
When using your cellular telephone, you should always:
The transmission power must not exceed
10 W.
The devices must possess a type approval for
your vehicle and have an “e” symbol.
If you should require equipment with transmission
power values greater than 10 W, please consult
your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
The dealer is familiar with the technical requirements for installing devices of this kind.
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the
road and park before making or answering a
call if traffic conditions so require; and
The improper installation of radios or telephones
or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
antenna inside the car may cause the warning
lights to come on.
f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the
road and park before using a hand-held telephone.
Improper installation of such equipment can create a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealership technicians or outside the selling dealer,
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car Warranty.
f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
the installation of non Porsche approved equipment.
Reception quality
The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interference caused by buildings, landscape and weather
is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult
to hear when using the hands-free function due to
external noise such as engine and wind noise.
Automatic car-wash
f Unscrew external antennas before using an automatic car-wash.
Operation, Safety
103
Antenna
f Always unscrew the external antenna before
using an automatic car-wash.
Hands-free microphone
iPod, USB and AUX
Hands-free microphones installed at the factory
must be adapted to the type of telephone in use.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you.
The interfaces for iPod, USB and AUX are located
in the storage tray between the seats.
f Please refer to the chapter “External Audio
Source” in the separate PCM/CDR operating
instructions.
Note
Do not leave an iPod, USB storage device or an
external audio source in the vehicle for a
prolonged period as extreme ambient conditions
(temperature fluctuations, air humidity) can occur
in the vehicle.
104
Operation, Safety
Roof Transport System
f Please follow the separate instructions for fitting the Roof Transport System.
f Only use Roof Transport Systems from the
Porsche Tequipment product range or Roof
Transport Systems which have been tested
and approved for your car by Porsche. Fitting
normal commercially available luggage racks
is not possible.
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows you
to carry various sports and hobby equipment.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to tell you
about the various different uses of the Roof Transport System.
Caution!
f Risk of damage to the paint on the rear lid.
Only open the rear lid if this cannot touch the
load.
f Completely remove the Roof Transport System
before using an automatic car wash - risk of damage to the vehicle!
f Do not exceed the maximum permitted payload of 132 lbs. (60 kg), the maximum permitted gross weight and the maximum permitted
axle loads.
f Distribute load evenly, storing heavy items as
low as possible. Items of luggage must not
project beyond the side of the load area.
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners).
f Before every trip, and at regular intervals
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if necessary and secure additionally by locking.
f When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size
and weight of the load being carried. But never
drive faster than 90 mph (140 km/h).
f With the basic carrier fitted and no load, do not
exceed a maximum speed of 110 mph
(180 km/h).
f Driving, braking and steering behavior change
due to the higher center of gravity and the greater wind-resistant area. You should adapt your
driving style appropriately.
f Since fuel consumption and noise are increased with the Roof Transport System fitted, it
should not remain on the vehicle if not in use.
f Please see the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Page 272.
Operation, Safety
105
Warning!
Risk of accident when using the HomeLink if
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
f When using the HomeLink, ensure that no
persons, animals or objects are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
being operated.
f Observe the safety notes for the original
hand-held transmitter.
Preconditions for operating and
programming the HomeLink:
– Ignition is switched on.
1, 2, 3 - Programmable buttons
A - Light-emitting diode for status identification
– Daytime driving lights/fog lights are switched
off.
HomeLink
To operate the respective device:
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
original hand-held transmitters used to operate
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the
property, alarm system).
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency
of an original handheld transmitter.
106
Operation, Safety
f Press the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3).
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
transfer.
Note on operation
f Always use the HomeLink opener in the
direction of travel.
Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
out.
f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
programmed signals of the HomeLink.
f Please read the instructions for the original
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
f Always fit new batteries in your hand-held transmitter before programming the transmitter.
Programming HomeLink with fixed code
hand-held transmitters
1. Press and hold the desired button until the
light-emitting diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original handheld transmitter until the daytime driving lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.
Programming HomeLink with changeable
code hand-held transmitters
Allocating signals to the buttons
f Please follow the operating instructions for the
original hand-held transmitter.
Prior to programming the HomeLink for the
first time
The following process deletes the standard codes
set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
program further buttons.
f Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until lightemitting diode A begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
1. Press and hold the desired button until the
light-emitting diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
steps 2 and 3.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original handheld transmitter until the daytime driving lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. To synchronize the system:
Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator.
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
30 seconds to initiate step 5.
5. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
(With some devices, the button to be allocated
must be pressed a third time in order to
complete the setting process.)
6. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
other buttons.
Note
Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
might be necessary.
The daytime driving lights will flash once the 5
minutes have been exceeded. Programming must
be repeated from the beginning.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
if you have not been able to successfully
allocate signals for the garage door opener to
the buttons even though you have carefully
followed the instructions in this chapter and
the operating instructions for the original handheld transmitter.
Deleting programmed signals of the
HomeLink
(e.g., when selling the vehicle)
Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3 depressed
for approx. 20 seconds until light-emitting diode A
begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.
Operation, Safety
107
108
Operation, Safety
Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating
Air Conditioning.........................................
Automatic Air Conditioning System .............
Central and Side Vents ..............................
Fresh-air Intake .........................................
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating ...
Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating
110
113
116
116
117
109
A - Defrosting the windshield
B - Heated rear window
C - Temperature sensor
D - AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
E - Recirculating-air button
F - Temperature button
G - AC max
H - Air distribution to footwell
I - Air distribution to central and side vents
J - Air distribution to windshield
K - Blower speed button
Air Conditioning
Setting temperature
Air quantity, air distribution, and temperature can
be set on the control panel.
f Press button F upwards or downwards
respectively.
The display panel shows the following
The selected temperature is shown on the display
by a bar display.
– Temperature
If a bar cannot be seen, the temperature is set
to maximum cold.
– Air-conditioning compressor on/off
– Blower speed
– AC max
– Air distribution
110
If all bars can be seen, the temperature is set to
maximum warm.
Note
f For maximum cooling, activate AC max
button G.
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
Adjusting blower speed
f Press button K upwards or downwards
respectively.
The preset blower speed is increased or decreased.
The blower speed is shown on the display by a bar
display.
The compressor is switched off at low blower
speeds.
Defrosting the windshield
f Press button A (switch on or off).
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Air flows to the windshield only.
Recirculating-air setting
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only the
inside air is circulated.
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
setting off immediately by pressing the
recirculating-air button again and select the
”Defrost windshield“ function.
Switching recirculating-air mode on or off
f Press recirculating-air button E.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
AC OFF– switching the air-conditioning
compressor on and off
The air conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor can
be switched on or off manually.
The compressor can be switched off manual to
save fuel.
f Press AC OFF button D.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The compressor is switched off.
f If the interior temperature is too high, switch
on the compressor again.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor.
This prevents fogging of windows.
AC max operation
In AC max operation, the interior of your vehicle is
cooled as quickly as possible.
f Press AC max button H.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Air distribution
The individual air distributions can be combined as
desired.
If an air distribution is not selected, no symbol
appears in the display panel. Air flows then from
all vents as well as to the windshield.
Recommended setting in Summer –
Air distribution to central and side vents
Recommended setting in Winter –
Air distribution to footwell and windshield
Air distribution to footwell
f Press button H.
The selection appears on the display panel.
The air flows to the footwell.
Air distribution to center and side
vents
f Press button I.
The selection appears on the display panel.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
Air distribution to windshield
f Press button J.
The selection appears on the display panel.
The air flows to the windshield.
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
111
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
– May switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– The air-conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and humidity, condensation can drip from the evaporator and form a pool under the car.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set, switch off the air
conditioning compressor and have the fault
remedied.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
112
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
ABCDEFGHI JK-
Defrosting the windshield
Heated rear window
Temperature sensor
AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
Recirculating-air button
Temperature button
AUTO button (automatic mode)
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to central and side vents
Air distribution to windshield
Blower speed button
Automatic Air Conditioning System Automatic mode
The automatic air-conditioning system controls
the preselected interior temperature completely
automatically.
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually adjusted.
f Press AUTO button G.
AUTO will appear on the display panel.
Air quantity and distribution are automatically
controlled and variations are compensated.
All automatic setting functions can be individually
changed.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button is pressed.
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
113
Setting temperature
f Press button F upwards or downwards
respectively.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted between 61 °F and 85 °F/16 °C
and 29.5 °C.
Recommendation: 72 °F/22 °C.
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating power.
Automatic control is no longer active.
Note
If the preselected temperature is changed, the
blower speed can increase automatically in automatic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
Sensors
Defrosting the windshield
f Press button A (switch on or off).
The windshield is defogged or defrosted as
quickly as possible.
Air flows to the windshield only.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
f Press button K upwards or downwards respectively.
The preset blower speed is increased or
decreased.
AC OFF – switching compressor for airconditioning system on and off
If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest
blower stage, the blower and automatic control
are switched off. “OFF” will appear on the display
field.
The air-conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor is
always switched on in automatic mode.
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
but control comfort is then limited:
To avoid affecting the performance of the air-conditioning system:
f Press AC OFF button D.
The compressor is switched off.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument
panel or the temperature sensor C.
f If the interior temperature is too high, switch
compressor back on or press AUTO button.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor.
This prevents fogging of windows.
114
Adjusting blower speed
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
Pressing the button upwards or pressing the
AUTO button switches the blower and automatic
control back on again.
Recirculating-air setting
Warning!
Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
setting off immediately by pressing the
circulating-air button again and select the
“Defrost windshield” function.
Switching recirculating-air setting on or off
f Press button E.
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
the inside air is circulated.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Over approx. 37 °F/3 °C
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it
switches on automatically. The duration of recirculating-air setting is not limited.
Below approx. 37 °F/3 °C
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off.
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended
after approx. 3 minutes.
Air distribution
The individual air distributions can be combined as
desired.
Recommended setting in Summer:
Air distribution to central and side vents.
Recommended setting in Winter:
Air distribution to footwell and windshield.
Air distribution to footwell
f Press button H.
The air flows to the footwell.
The selection appears on the display panel.
Air distribution to central and side
vents
f Press button I.
The air flows from the central and side vents.
Vents must be open.
The selection appears on the display panel.
Air distribution to windshield
f Press button J.
The air flows to the windshield.
The selection appears on the display panel.
Note on operation
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, individual air conditioning settings can be
stored on your vehicle key.
Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
General instructions for air-conditioning
compressor
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an extreme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures below approx. 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be
switched on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with windows
closed.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, it
is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly
with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and humidity, condensation can drip from the evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set, switch off the airconditioning compressor and have the fault
repaired at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
115
Fresh-air Intake
To ensure proper air intake:
f Keep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.
A - Continuous opening and closing
B - Setting vent direction
Central and Side Vents
Opening vents
f Rotate knurled wheel upward.
Changing air flow direction
f Move the vanes to make the air flow in the
desired direction.
Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered
from all vents, depending on the air-distribution
setting on the operating panel.
Closing vents
f Rotate knurled wheel downward.
116
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
Switching on
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heating switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.
Switching off
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Heated Rear Window/Door
Mirror Heating
The heated rear window/door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
117
118
Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Instrument Panel USA Models ..................... 120
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................ 122
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ...... 124
Instrument Illumination ............................... 124
Trip Odometer .......................................... 125
Speedometer ............................................ 126
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers .. 126
Tachometer .............................................. 127
Turn Signal Indicator Light ......................... 127
High Beam Indicator Light .......................... 127
Gear Shift Indicator
(in vehicles with manual transmission) ......... 127
Cooling System ......................................... 128
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................. 129
Fuel .......................................................... 130
Clock ....................................................... 131
Outside Temperature ................................. 131
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................ 133
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................ 134
Warnings on the instrument panel and
the on-board computer .............................. 166
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
119
Instrument Panel USA Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual.
1.Speedometer with analogue display
2.Automatic speed control indicator light
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left/right
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.ABS warning light
8.Cooling system
Temperature gage, warning light
14.Check Engine warning light
(Emission control warning light)
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
15.Central warning light
Note
16.On-board computer display
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
17.Porsche Stability Management
PSM Multifunctional light
18.Brake warning light
19.Safety belt warning light
20.Gear display
21.PDK transmission, selector lever position
22.Clock and outside temperature display
23.Adjustment button for clock
9.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
10.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
11.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
12.Light sensor for instrument illumination
13.Airbag warning light
120
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
This information can help to warn you about situations which may be hazardous to you or your car.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
121
Instrument Panel Canada Models
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual.
1.Speedometer with analogue display
2.Automatic speed control indicator light
3.Tire pressure warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left/right
5.Tachometer
6.High beam indicator light
7.ABS warning light
8.Cooling system
Temperature gage, warning light
14.Check Engine warning light
(Emission control warning light)
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
15.Central warning light
Note
16.On-board computer display
Warnings that have been given are stored in the
appropriate control unit memory and can be read
out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
17.Porsche Stability Management
PSM Multifunctional light
18.Brake warning light
19.Safety belt warning light
20.Gear display
21.PDK transmission, selector lever position
22.Clock and outside temperature display
23.Adjustment button for clock
9.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
10.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
11.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
12.Light sensor for instrument illumination
13.Airbag warning light
122
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
This information can help to warn you about situations which may be hazardous to you or your car.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
123
Instrument Illumination
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on,
the instrument and switch symbol brightness can
be manually adjusted.
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
Note
A - Adjustment button for instrument illumination and
trip counter
Automatic Speed Control
Indicator light
When the car lights are switched on, the instrument lighting for light dials switches on and off
automatically depending on the ambient brightness.
Indicates automatic speed control readiness.
124
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Dimming instrument illumination
f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate direction and hold it until the desired brightness
has been reached.
The chosen level of brightness is indicated by a
bar display in the display field of the on-board
computer.
Resetting to zero
f Press adjustment button A for approximately
one second or
f Reset the distance in the “SET” menu of the onboard computer.
Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 163.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to “0”.
Trip Odometer
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
125
Speedometer
The digital speedometer is integrated in the onboard computer.
The indication changes from mph to km/h when
the units are changed from miles to kilometers.
Changing over between
Miles / Kilometers
The units of the distance and speed displays can
be changed in the “SET” menu of the on-board
computer.
f Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 163.
126
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Caution!
To avoid severe engine damage.
f Always observe the engine rpm before downshifting to a lower gear, so you do not exceed
the maximum engine rpm.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
Left arrow – left turn signals
Right arrow – right turn signals
f If the frequency of the display becomes noticeably faster, check the operation of the turn signals.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The beginning of the red marks at the right end of
the scale indicates the maximum permissible engine rpm.
A speed limiter prevents the engine from being
overrevved during acceleration. Before reaching
this area, the next higher gear should be selected.
Shift to the next lower gear when the engine rpm
drops below 1,500 rpm.
High Beam Indicator Light
Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
switched on.
The indicator light goes out when the high beams
are switched off.
The indicator light flashes in the event of cornering
light failure.
Gear Shift Indicator
(in vehicles with manual transmission)
The consumption-orientated gear shift indicator A
on the display panel of the on-board computer
assists a fuel-saving driving style. The gear shift
indicator lights up as a recommendation to shift
up to the next-higher gear depending on the
selected gear, engine rpm and accelerator pedal
position.
f When the gear shift indicator A lights up,
change to the next higher gear to decrease
fuel consumption.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
127
Pointer in the middle – normal operating temperature
The pointer may move up to the red area when engine is heavily loaded and outside temperature is
high, but should return to “normal” when engine
load is reduced.
Warning light “A”
If the coolant temperature is too high, the warning light comes on.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
Cooling System
Temperature gage (ignition on)
USA: Display in °F
Canada: Display in °C
Pointer to the left – engine cold
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
loading.
128
If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
flashes.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
f Switch engine off and allow to cool.
f Add coolant after the engine has cooled to the
touch.
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 187.
Caution!
f Pull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
to cool.
Risk of engine damage.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of
car for obstructions.
f If the warning lights come on even though coolant level is correct, do not continue driving.
f Check coolant level.
If necessary, add coolant and have fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 187.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
To prevent excessive temperatures, the coolingair passages must not be restricted by coverings
(e.g. films, “stone guards”).
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Engine compartment blower fan
In addition, this warning light flashes to indicate a
fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning messages
If the selector lever is between two positions
– Effects:
The corresponding selector lever position
flashes on the instrument cluster and the
warning “Selector lever not engaged” appears
on the on-board computer.
Remedy:
Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.
If there is a fault in the transmission
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)
Indicator for PDK selector lever position
and engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and the engaged forward gear are
indicated in gates D or M.
– Depending on priority, the warning “Transmission emergency run” in white or red lettering or
the warning “Transmission temperature too
high” is displayed on the on-board computer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” white
f Effects:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
Failure of reverse gear.
Remedy:
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
– Effect:
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immediately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
– Effects:
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
the engine power may be restricted.
Remedies:
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
to run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
f Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 184.
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPELKUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 178.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
129
Note
If a small quantity of fuel is added to a nearly empty fuel tank, the fuel gage cannot measure the added fuel accurately. The „remaining range“ readout
will also be incorrect.
Warning light “A”
When the engine is running, the warning light
of the level gage lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
f Fill up at the next opportunity.
Fuel
Level gage
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 271.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going up
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may
occur.
130
Caution!
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 198.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
If the level gage warning light flashes, there
has been a system fault.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
There will then be no reserve warning.
f To remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Setting the time
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.
f Switch ignition on.
Setting hours
f Press adjustment button A for about one second.
Hour display flashes.
A - Adjustment button for clock
B - Clock
C - Outside temperature display
Clock
The clock is blanked out approximately four minutes after the ignition is switched off or when the
car is locked.
f Turn button in the appropriate direction:
to right – increase hours figure
to left – decrease hours figure.
Adjustment in hours – turn button briefly
Fast adjustment (display cycles) –
turn and hold button.
Leaving adjustment mode
Automatically after one minute or:
f Press adjustment button again.
When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
pressing the button, the time begins precisely to
the second.
Note
The time mode can be changed between 12h and
24h in the on-board computer.
Outside Temperature
The outside temperature display C does not indicate, if ice is on the road.
Even if a temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) is displayed, ice may still form on the road, for instance
on bridges or when the road passes through a
heavily shaded area.
Setting minutes
f Press adjustment button again.
Minutes display flashes.
f Set by rotating as in hours mode.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
131
Central Warning Light
Battery
If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning
message will be displayed by the on-board computer.
The central warning light on the instrument panel
lights up if there are warning messages in the
INFO menu.
If the warning is displayed by the on-board
computer while the engine is running or while
driving:
The messages can be called in the on-board
computer INFO menu:
f Stop the car in a safe place and stop the
engine.
f Please see the chapter “INFO WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 140.
Possible causes
– Defect in the battery charging system.
– Broken drive belt.
Warning!
Risk of engine damage with resultant loss of
control and accident, leading to serious personal injury or death.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is required to steer) and coolant pump function
will stop.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
132
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Brake Warning Light USA
Brake Warning Light Canada
The warning light on the instrument panel lights
up:
– if the handbrake is on,
– if the brake fluid level is low,
– if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
– if the brake circuit division is defective.
Additionally, a warning is displayed by the onboard computer.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 166.
Check Engine
(Emission Control)
Warning Light
The emission control system detects malfunctions
early that could, for example, cause increased
pollutant emissions or consequential damage.
Faults are indicated by a continuously lit or
flashing instrument panel warning light.
The faults are recorded in the control unit's fault
memory.
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up
when the ignition is switched on as a bulb check
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
starts. If the warning light does not light up, have
the bulb replaced promptly.
The warning light in the instrument panel flashes to
indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring)
which might cause damage to certain parts of the
emission control system.
f In this case, immediately reduce the engine
load by easing off the accelerator.
f In order to avoid consequential damage to the
engine or emission control system (e.g. catalytic converter), have the fault diagnosed and
rectified immediately at the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
If the warning light in the instrument panel lights up
permanently without flashing before and remains
on while driving, it suggests:
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or
– the vehicle was refueled while the engine was
running.
f Stop immediately at a suitable and secure
place and check tank cap for proper fastening.
If tank cap was fastened correctly, see your authorized Porsche dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Caution!
If the check engine warning light in the instrument panel is flashing, serious catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur.
Prolonged driving with the check engine warning light on could cause damage to the
emission control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
133
Operating lever
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.
Selecting functions of the on-board
computer
f Push lever up 3 or down 4.
Confirming selection (Enter)
f Push the lever forward 1.
Moving back one or several selection levels
f Pull the lever back 2 once or several times or
f
On-Board Computer (BC)
Operation, controls
Display field
It is not possible to describe all details of the onboard computer functions in this Owner’s Manual.
However, the examples will quickly familiarize you
with the operational principle and help you to
navigate through the menu structure.
The display field is beneath the tachometer.
Readiness for operation
– With ignition switched on,
You can restore the factory default settings at any
time by using the “SET” menu.
– with engine running.
134
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Select the arrow on the on-board computer display with the operating lever and push
the operating lever forward 1.
Note
You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
the operating lever several times.
5 - Button for voice control
f Please refer to the separate operating
instructions for Porsche Communication
Management (PCM).
Basic setting
– Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can
be selected in the SET menu.
Calling on-board computer functions in
display “C”
f Push operating lever up or down
(selection field D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
– Average speed (ø mph),
– Average consumption (ø mpg),
– Range on remaining fuel (mls
),
– Tire pressure
A - Digital speedometer
B - Central display
C - Bottom display
– Navigation information
(if activated in the SET menu).
Functions and display possibilities
Note
Note
The available items and displays in the on-board
computer depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this reason it is possible that some of the
items and displays shown here are not available in
your on-board computer.
The values “Average speed”, “Average consumption” and “Daily trip mileage” can be reset to zero
in the SET menu.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
135
D - Switching selection field “D” on or off
f Push operating lever forward or back.
E - Arrow symbol for continuation
Arrow symbol:
The following menus are available, depending on
vehicle equipment:
f Push operating lever down in order to page
through the menu.
1. LIMIT
Arrow symbol:
3. TEL
f Push operating lever up in order to page
through the menu.
4. CHRONO
2. INFO
5. AUDIO
6. NAVI
7. OIL
8. TPM
9. SET
136
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
LIMIT
Acoustic warning signal for speed limit
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
The signal sounds when the preset speed is exceeded.
For the signal to sound again, the driving speed
must fall below the preset speed by at least
3 mph (5 km/h).
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
Setting the speed
f Select LIMIT with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
137
Option 1:
Accepting current speed
f Push operating lever forward.
Option 2:
Presetting speed
f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever:
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the
current speed.
not active
active
Display:
If the vehicle is stationary, the message “Cannot
be accepted with car stopped” is displayed.
138
f If “not active”, push the operating lever forward.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f Select “xx mph” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Switching the acoustic warning signal off
f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Display:
f Push operating lever slightly up or down until
the desired speed is reached.
upwards: speed is increased
downwards: speed is decreased
Note
Holding the lever up or down for a longer period
will adjust the speed in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h).
f Push operating lever forward.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
139
INFO
Warning messages
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select “Messages” with the operating lever.
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
Calling warning messages
Any existing warning messages can be called using the operating lever.
You also can call warning messages which were
cancelled during the journey (but only until the next
time the ignition is switched on).
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
140
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forwards or pull backwards.
The display returns to the Info menu.
Service
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
Recalling service information
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
TEL
Telephone information
f Push operating lever forward.
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
Recalling telephone information
f Select TEL with the operating lever.
f Select “Service” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f The time until the next service is displayed in
miles and days.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
141
Note
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived
during your absence, via the menu item “Missed
calls”.
142
Example:
Selecting from the telephone book and
calling
f Select “Phone book” with the operating lever.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select a person to call and push the operating
lever forward.
The connection is established.
f Push the operating lever forward to end the
call.
Incoming call
f Select “Accept” or “Refuse” and push the
operating lever forward.
Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the
menu item “Missed calls”.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
143
Stopwatch on the instrument panel
Note on operation
The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital display.
The large pointer of the analogue display measures the seconds. The two small pointers measure
hours and minutes. The display re-starts at zero after 12 hours.
Seconds and increments of 1/100th of a second
can be read on the digital display.
The digital display and the display in the on-board
computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
When you leave the CHRONO menu while the stopwatch is running, measurement will continue.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left
and to the right.
Stopwatch displays:
CHRONO
Stopwatch
You can use the stopwatch to measure time intervals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche
Communication Management (PCM).
– on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
– in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
– on the performance display in the PCM.
Starting/stopping stopwatch
All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via
the on-board computer menu CHRONO.
f Please observe the chapter “Sport display” in
the separate PCM operating instructions.
144
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
off. If the ignition is switched on again within approx. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to
run.
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
selecting “Reset” in the CHRONO menu.
Starting the timing
f Push operating lever forward.
The selection field is switched on.
f Select CHRONO with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward.
The time runs on all stopwatch displays.
The on-board computer display changes to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
145
Stopping the timing
After time measurement is started, the on-board
computer display changes to the “Stop timing/Intermediate time”.
f Select “Stop timing” with the operating lever.
146
f Push lever forward.
The time is stopped in all stopwatch displays,
and the on-board computer display changes to
the “Continue/Reset” selection.
The timing can be continued or reset to zero.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Continue timing
After timing has been stopped, the on-board computer display changes to the “Continue/Reset” selection.
f Push operating lever forward.
The stopwatch displays continue the timing.
The on-board computer display returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. You
can stop the stopwatch or measure an intermediate time.
Resetting the time
After timing has been stopped, the on-board computer display changes to the “Continue/Reset” selection.
f Select “Reset” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display returns to the “Start timing”
selection.
The stopwatch displays in the instrument panel
and the on-board computer are reset to zero.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
147
A - Lap
B - Intermediate time
Displaying intermediate times
After timing has been started, the on-board computer display changes to the “Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The intermediate times B are for your information.
Measured lap times A can be stored and evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche Communication Management (PCM).
148
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f Select “Intermediate time” with the operating
lever and push the operating lever forwards.
The intermediate time will be displayed for
approx. 5 seconds.
The on-board computer display then returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure another intermediate time.
In order to start timing a new lap:
The “New lap?” selection appears for 5 seconds
after selection of “Intermediate time”.
f Select “New lap?” with the operating lever and
push the operating lever forwards.
The new lap is displayed on the on-board computer and the PCM. Timing on the on-board computer
and on the PCM begins from zero. The stopwatch
in the instrument panel continues to show the total
time.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
149
f The on-board computer display returns to the
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection after
a short period.
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure another intermediate time or a new lap.
AUDIO
NAVI
Switching on selection field “D”
Switching on selection field “D”
Selecting a radio station
Select destination
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select “AUDIO” with the operating lever.
f Select the desired station.
f Push the operating lever up or down.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select “NAVI” with the operating lever.
f Select the desired function with the operating
lever:
– Last destinations
– Destination memory
– Route guidance
150
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f The driver is responsible for filling the tires
correctly and making the correct settings on
the on-board computer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions:
– Display of the actual tire pressure while the
vehicle is in motion.
– Display of the deviation from the required
pressure (refilling pressure).
– Display of currently set tire size and type.
– Tire pressure warnings in two stages.
Warning!
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
f Despite the advantages offered by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s responsibility to update the corresponding settings in the on-board computer and maintain
the pressure in the tires.
Low tire pressure reduces the road safety of
the vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring continuously
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire
pressure is too low.
f When a flat tire has been displayed, immediately stop in a suitable place and check the
tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the
damage with a tire sealant.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring take place on the on-board
computer.
However, you must still adjust the tire pressure on
the wheel.
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
damaged tires.
TPM
Tire Pressure Monitoring
f Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
f Damaged tires must be immediately replaced
by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
circumstances.
f If a fault occurs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring
(e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an
authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
have the damage repaired.
The tire pressure will not be monitored at all or
will be monitored only partially by defective
Tire Pressure Monitoring.
f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
being present. A tire pressure warning will then
appear in the on-board computer display.
Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
f The Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
as well as about a gradual loss of pressure due
to foreign objects.
The Tire Pressure Mnitoring cannot warn you
about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g.
flat tire due to abrupt external effects).
f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
151
Warning!
This display is for informational purposes
only. Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Changing the tire pressure to incorrect
pressures could adversely affect the performance, driving characteristics, and safety of
your vehicle.
f Maintain tire pressures according to the units
indicated on the tire pressure plate, located on
the drivers side door of the vehicle.
Displaying the tire pressure function of the
on-board computer
Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer
f Push operating lever up or down until the tire
pressure function of the on-board computer
appears.
(The selection field must be switched off.)
The tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures (actual
pressure) dependent on temperature in the four
wheels.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
temperature increases while driving.
This display is only for information.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Pressure info in tire pressure menu
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
change in temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relationship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
f Please see the chapter “PRESSURE INCREASE
AS THE RESULT OF TEMPERATURE
INCREASE” on Page 160.
You can read the tire pressures to be
corrected in this display.
152
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)
is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If “ –1.5 psi (–0.1 bar)” is displayed,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) must be added to this tire.
Note
The tire pressure menu can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.
Calling up the “Info pressure” display
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select “Info pressure” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Note
After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are
displayed. Dashes (“-.-”) appear instead of the tire
pressures.
f Select “Info tires” with the operating lever.
Tire type info in Tire pressure menu
Information about the currently set tires:
f Push operating lever forward.
– Tire type: Summer tires, winter tires
Tire selection in the “Set” menu
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
– Tire size: 17, 18, 19 inch
“Info tires” shows the current tire settings.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
Calling up the “Info tires” display
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
153
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select “Set” with the operating lever.
f Push the operating lever forward.
f Select desired tire type:
summer or winter.
f Push operating lever forward.
A display for confirming the selected type of
tire appears.
154
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
f Select “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward.
f Select the appropriate tire size (17, 18 or 19
inch) and push operating lever forwards. A display for confirming the selected tire size appears.
f Select “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward.
Note
This menu is displayed only if the tire pressures
are different for the approved tire sizes.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
155
Note
Tire pressure warnings
The message “Process aborted” appears if the
setting process is interrupted. All entries made up
to this point are lost, and the original settings
remain in effect.
Only if the message “Process complete” appears
after the settings have been made will the Tire
Pressure Monitoring re-learn the wheels.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel and a corresponding message on the onboard computer warn about loss of pressure in
two stages, depending on the amount of pressure
loss.
f Please see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING”
on Page 158.
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information
should be supplemented in the on-board
computer.
The tire selection has only been successfully
completed when the message “Process
complete” is displayed by the on-board computer.
f Select arrow (Back) and push the operating
lever forward. The display returns to the tire
pressure menu.
The on-board computer additionally displays
the message “System learning”.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
f Use only tires approved by Porsche.
The available items in the tire pressure menu
depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this
reason it is possible that some of the items shown
here are not available on your on-board
computer’s display.
f Make sure that tire pressures correspond to
the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressure if necessary.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
156
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Driving with insufficient tire pressure reduces the
road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and
wheel.
Stage 1 – Add air
The pressure in the tire is too low by 4 to 7 psi (0.3
to 0.5 bar).
f The tire pressure warning contains the
affected tire with the tire pressure to be added.
Correct the tire pressure at the next
opportunity.
This tire pressure warning also appears when
driving and can be acknowledged.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected.
This tire pressure warning appears
Stage 2 – Flat tire
– for approx. 10 seconds with vehicle stopped
when switching off the ignition or
At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
– again when switching on the ignition.
With ignition on, the warning can be deactivated.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected.
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
than 7 psi (0.5 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
than 5 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
f When the tire pressure warning appears, stop
immediately at a suitable location. Check the
indicated tire for signs of damage. If necessary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire
pressure.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
157
System learning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to “learn” the
wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
replacement or update of the tire settings. During
this process, the Tire Pressure Monitoring recognizes the tires and their locations.
The on-board computer displayes the message
“TPM is learning, monitoring not act.”.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this
time, the current tire pressures are not available
on the on-board-computer:
– The tire pressure warning light remains lit until
all wheels have been learned.
– The display of the tire pressure function of the
on-board computer shows lines.
– The required pressures for cold tires at 68 °F
(20 °C) are indicated in the Info pressure
display in the tire pressure menu.
Position and pressure information is displayed as
soon as the Tire Pressure Monitoring has assigned the wheels identified as belonging to the
vehicle to the correct wheel positions.
The wheel learning process takes place
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
(vehicle speed above 25 km/h (16 mph)).
f Check the tire pressure for all wheels on the
“Info pressure” display.
f Correct the tire pressure to the required
pressure if necessary.
158
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Changing a wheel and replacing tires
f New wheels must be fitted with radio transmitters for the Tire Pressure Monitoring.
Before tires are changed, the battery charge
state of the wheel transmitters should be
checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Switch the ignition off when changing a wheel.
The tire settings on the on-board computer must
be updated after changing a wheel.
If the tire settings are not updated, the message
“Wheel change? Input new TPM settings!” is
displayed on the on-board computer.
f Update the on-board computer settings when
the vehicle is stationary the next time.
Warning light
Warning!
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPM
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly.
The TPM malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPM malfuntions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPM from functioning properly.
Always check the TPM malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPM to continue to
function properly.
The warning light in the speedometer lights up:
In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure Monitoring
or a temporary fault, the warning light in the
speedometer flashes for approx. one minute and
then remains continuously illuminated.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
has been rectified.
Partial monitoring
Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there
is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters.
– The tire pressure warning light lights up.
– The message “TPM partial monitoring” is
displayed on the on-board computer.
– No tire pressures are displayed on the onboard computer for wheels with faulty wheel
transmitters.
No monitoring
In the event of faults the Tire Pressure Monitoring
cannot monitor the tire pressure.
The warning light in the speedometer flashes for
approx. one minute and then remains continuously
illuminated and a corresponding message
appears on the on-board computer.
Monitoring is not active when:
– the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
– wheel transmitters for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring are missing,
– during the learning phase after the tire settings
have been updated,
– after a wheel change without updating the tire
settings,
– more than four wheel transmitters are
detected,
– there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
– tire temperatures are too high.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 166.
– When a loss in pressure has been detected.
– When learning newly mounted wheels/wheel
sensors, as long as the vehicle’s own wheels
have not yet been recognized.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
159
Pressure increase as the result of
temperature increase
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
change in temperature.
Tire pressure specifications
Information on tire pressure for public roads can
be found in this Owner's Manual in the Technical
Data chapter or on the tire-pressure plate in the
left door aperture.
These values apply to cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C)
ambient temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relationship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.
160
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
OIL
Display and measurement of the engine
oil level
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
f Regularly check the oil level each time before
refueling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
minimum mark.
Conditions for measuring the oil level
1. Vehicle stationary.
2. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is
horizontal for correct oil level measurement
to occur.
Initiating oil level measurement
4. Allow waiting time to elapse.
3. Engine must be at operating temperature
(at least 140 °F/60 °C).
1. Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
4. Engine must be idling.
2. Select “OIL” with the operating lever.
5. Once the measurement has been completed,
you can read off the engine oil level on the
segment display.
3. Push operating lever forward. Measurement is
started.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
161
f Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 189.
f Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the maximum mark.
Failure
A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
warning message on the on-board computer.
“Check engine oil level” display
The on-board computer display “Check engine oil
level” is an additional measurement that takes
place in the background while driving.
6. If the segments are filled in up to the top line,
the oil level has reached the maximum mark.
Under no circumstances add engine oil.
7. If the bottom segment is filled in, the oil level
has reached the minimum mark.
Add engine oil immediately.
8. If the bottom segment flashes, the oil level has
dropped to below the minimum mark.
Add engine oil immediately.
The difference between the minimum and
maximum marks on the segment display is
approx. 1.3 quarts (1.25 litres).
One segment of the display corresponds to a
top-up quantity of approx. 0.42 quarts (0.4 litre).
f Add engine oil if necessary.
Switch off ignition before adding engine oil.
162
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
The display depends on the distance travelled.
This display appears if the oil level has reached the
minimum mark or if the oil level is well above the
maximum mark.
This message must be acknowledged by measuring the engine oil level manually using the onboard computer.
f Please see the chapter “INITIATING OIL LEVEL
MEASUREMENT” on Page 161.
If an oil level measurement was initiated manually
on the on-board computer and no oil was topped
up, the message “Check engine oil level” is
displayed again when the vehicle is driven.
Display
(Select central line of the on-board
computer)
– Change display
Audio information (set radio station)
Range on remaining fuel
Empty
– Telephone Info
When Telephone information is active, incoming telephone calls are displayed on the onboard computer.
SET
Basic setting on on-board computer
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
Changing the basic setting of the on-board
computer
f Select “SET” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select the desired function with the operating
lever:
Reset
– Reset all,
Reset average consumption,
Reset average speed,
Reset trip counter
Units
– Speedometer: km - km/h, miles - mph
– Consumption:
l/100 km, mls/gal (USA), mpg (UK), km/l
– Temperature: °Celsius, °Fahrenheit
– Tire pressure: bar, psi
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
163
f Please see the chapter “DAYTIME DRIVING
LIGHTS” on Page 78.
f Please see the chapter “DAYTIME DRIVING
LIGHTS” on Page 80.
General information regarding the
on-board computer functions
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously recalculated during the journey based on the fuel level,
current consumption and average consumption.
The more the fuel level falls, the more spontaneously the display reacts. For this reason, the
range on remaining fuel is not displayed if less
than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
Navigation
12/24h mode
– Integrated in the BC
(Navigation instructions can be recalled on the
on-board computer display)
Select time mode:
– When turning off
(Navigation instructions are only shown before
changing direction)
Basic setting
– Restore the basic setting of the on-board computer
– 12h (small squares on the right side of the time
display for AM/PM),
– 24h
Light
USA only:
Switch daytime driving lights on and off.
Language
– Select language version
164
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched off)
Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched on)
If the vehicle's inclination changes while driving or
refueling, incorrect range information may temporarily be given.
Note
If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with only
a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on remaining fuel is impossible.
Average consumption and average speed
Tire pressure
The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
The Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures dependent
on temperature in the four wheels. You can watch
the tire pressure rise and fall while driving.
The display is only for information.
You can set the starting time for a measurement
before or during the trip.
Switching the ignition off does not reset the measurements. It is therefore possible to collect values
over long periods.
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
memories to be erased.
f To correct the tire pressures, always use the
displayed values from the “Info pressure”
display in the tire pressure menu.
Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
165
Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly –
in particular, always check the engine oil level before refueling.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
Seat belt
Driver and passengers must fasten their seat
belts.
Handbrake
Handbrake is still on.
Ignition key
not removed
166
Warnings
Replace battery
in ignition key
Replace the remote-control battery.
Ignition lock faulty,
please go to workshop
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Ignition lock faulty,
visit workshop now
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Relieve steering
Relieve the steering lock by moving the steering
wheel to the left or right.
Steering locked
The steering wheel lock remains engaged.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Lights on
Low beam/side marker lamps on
Parking light on
Left/right parking light on
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
Check left/right dipped beam (low
beam)
The reported light is faulty. Check bulb.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
also applies to:
direction indicator, high beam, side indicator light, reversing light
Daytime
driving lights off
Daytime driving lights switch off when the engine is shut off. Switch on lights if necessary.
Headlight beam
adjustment faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Front lid not closed
Close front luggage compartment lid properly.
Rear lid not closed
Close rear luggage compartment lid properly.
Rain sensor faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Steering wheel heating
ON
Steering wheel heating was switched on.
Steering wheel heating
OFF
Steering wheel heating was switched off.
Launch
control
active
Drive Off Assistant
failure
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Refill washer fluid
LIMIT
Cannot be accepted
with vehicle stopped
The current speed can only be accepted for the
acoustic warning signal when the vehicle is in
motion.
Warnings
167
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
LIMIT
30
Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph) for the
acoustic warning signal has been exceeded.
Adjust your speed if necessary.
Consider remaining range
Refuel at next opportunity.
Check engine oil level
Start engine oil level measurement in the
on-board computer.
Engine oil pressure too low
Stop immediately at a suitable place, measure
oil level with the on-board computer and, if necessary, add engine oil.
Warning light
Temperature gage
Engine temperature too high
Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary,
add coolant.
Temperature gage
warning light flashes
Check coolant level
Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level and, if necessary, add coolant.
Engine diagnostics – workshop
Stop immediately at a suitale place and check
tank cap for proper fastening. If the tank cap
was fastened correctly, consult your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Reduced engine power
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Failure of
engine compartment blower
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning battery/generator
Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Fuel gage warning
light
Temperature gage
warning light flashes
168
Warnings
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
Oil pressure gage faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil level display faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil temperature gage faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Oil temperature
too high
Switch engine off and let it cool. Check oil level
and, if necessary, add oil.
Please observe the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL“.
Indicator faulty
Coolant indicator failed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Brake pad wear
Have the brake pads changed immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning – Brake fluid level
Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning – Brake circuit division
Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
ABS failure
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM off
Porsche Stability Management has been
switched off.
Warnings
169
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Display of
selector lever position flashes
170
Warnings
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
PSM on
Porsche Stability Management has been
switched on.
PSM failure
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM
initialisation
Please observe the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION“.
PASM Normal/Sport
Indicator for selected PASM mode
PASM failure
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PASM indicator faulty
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Sport mode failure
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Airbag system fault
Airbag is faulty.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Check passenger’s seat setting
Weight sensing is impaired on the front
passenger's seat (Advanced Airbag).
Correct the seating position, set the backrest
upright, do not support weight on the armrests,
or lift on the handles.
Failure spoiler control
Driving stability is impaired.
Adjust your driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Selector lever is not engaged
Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Selector lever can be between two positions.
Engage the selector lever correctly.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
Move selector lever to P
Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Move selector lever to position P before withdrawing key from ignition lock.
Apply brake
Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Apply the brake when starting.
Depress clutch pedal
Manual transmission:
Depress clutch pedal when starting.
Move selector lever
to position P or N
Porsche Doppelkupplung:
The vehicle can be started only in the selector
lever position P or N.
Text display in white:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
failure of reverse gear.
Transmission
emergency run
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Text display in red:
No selector lever position is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Transmission
emergency run
It is not possible to continue driving. Immediately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Transmission
temperature
too high
Jerking can be felt when driving off, and the
engine power may be restricted.
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop the
vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine to
run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
Warnings
171
Instrument
panel
172
On-board
computer
Warnings
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
System fault
Go to workshop
Several systems may have failed. Adjust your
driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure of fuel level indicator
Workshop
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Service in mls/days
Service indicator
Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance/time shown has elapsed.
Please observe the additional information in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Service now
Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Flat tyre!
Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a serious
pressure loss.
Stop at a suitable place and check tires for damage. Fill in tire sealant if necessary.
Add air
The Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a
gradual pressure loss. Correct tire pressure at
the next opportunity.
TPM is learning
monitoring
not act.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is learning the
wheels on the vehicle. The Tire Pressure Monitoring is searching for the tires and their position. During this period the current pressure
specifications are not available on the on-board
computer.
TPM inactive
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument
panel
On-board
computer
Text display on on-board
computer
Meaning/measure
TPM partial monitoring
1 or 2 wheel transmitters are faulty. The tyre
pressures of these wheels are not monitored.
The other wheels are still monitored.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
TPM inactive
Brief disturbance
The Tire Pressure Monitoring is temporarily deactivated by excessive tire temperatures (approx. 248 °F (120 °C)) or external interference
(e.g. from other wheel transmitters inside the
car). Once the source of the interference is removed, the system is automatically reactivated.
TPM inactive
Too many wheel transmitters
Wheel change?
Input new
TPM settings!
Update the settings in the TPM menu of the
on-board computer at the next opportunity.
Wrong entries will affect the correct pressure information in the menu. The safety of your vehicle is at risk.
TPM
Indicator faulty
The display of the Tire Pressure Monitoring is
faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Acknowledging warning messages
Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
f Push the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the “INFO” menu.
Warnings
173
174
Warnings
Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch ...................... 176
Drive-Off Assistant...................................... 177
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ................... 178
Shifting Gears
175
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmission:
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
lever is completely engaged.
f Only shift into reverse when the car has come
to a complete stop.
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has fully engaged.
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary.
Reverse gear can be engaged after shifting the
gearshift lever as far as possible to the left.
Manual Transmission, Clutch
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
available at your authorized Porsche dealer.
176
Shifting Gears
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the backup lights are illuminated.
Permitted engine speed
f You should change into a higher gear before
the needle reaches the red mark on the
tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
feed is interrupted.
Caution!
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
shifting down to a lower gear.
f Take care not to exceed the maximum
permitted engine speed when shifting down.
Drive-Off Assistant
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
moving off on hills.
The vehicle must have sufficient road contact.
The Drive-Off Assistant is available on gradients as
from around 5%.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
Assistance by the Drive-Off Assistant is not
guaranteed when moving off on a slippery
surface (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces). In this
case, the vehicle could slip.
The limits dictated by the laws of physics
cannot be overcome, even with the Drive-Off
Assistant. The responsibility for moving off
on upward slopes is still the driver’s, despite
the Drive-Off Assistant.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
conditions and vehicle load, use the brake
pedal if necessary.
Risk of accident.
If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning,
the driver cannot be assisted when moving
off on hills.
f Hold the vehicle with the brake pedal.
Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant
(vehicles with manual transmission)
Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant
(vehicles with PDK transmission)
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
brake pedal.
The engine must be running.
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
brake pedal.
The engine must be running.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Select a gear corresponding to the direction
of travel up the slope (selector lever position
D or R).
3. Engage a gear corresponding to the direction
of travel up the slope (1st gear or reverse
gear).
4. Fully release the parking brake.
5. While keeping the clutch pedal depressed,
release the brake pedal.
The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
in order to allow driving off directly after the
brake is released.
6. Move off as usual.
Note on operation
The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
– If the clutch is not depressed.
– If the vehicle is not stationary.
– If the engine is not running.
– On gradients of less than 5%.
3. Fully release the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
in order to allow driving off directly after the
brake is released.
5. Move off as usual.
Note on operation
The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
– In the event of shift to neutral.
– If the vehicle is not stationary.
– If the engine is not running.
– On gradients of less than 5%.
– If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
– If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
Shifting Gears
177
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)
Starting
The Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a sevenspeed transmission with an “automatic” and a
“manual” selection mode.
The engine can be started only if the brake
pedal is depressed and the selector lever is in
position P or N.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever
position D), gear changing is automatic.
You can change temporarily from automatic to
manual mode using the shift buttons on the
steering wheel.
Driving off
f Only select the desired position for driving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the shift
buttons on the steering wheel or with the PDK
selector lever.
f Since the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
release the brake until you want to move off.
f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
You can change between selector lever position D
and M as you wish while driving.
Changing the selector lever position
Note
f Take care not to operate the shift buttons on
the steering wheel inadvertently in either
automatic or manual mode, thereby triggering
undesired gear changes.
The selector lever is locked when the ignition is
switched off.
When the ignition is switched on, the selector lever
can be moved from position P and N only when
the release button is pressed, and when the brake
pedal is pressed.
Release button
The release button (arrow) in the selector lever
prevents the gear from being changed unintentionally.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
to position R or P.
178
Shifting Gears
Driving off on hills
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
moving off on hills. The vehicle is held on the slope
for a short time during the change from the brake
pedal to the accelerator in order to allow driving
off directly after the brake is released.
f Please see the chapter “DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT” on Page 177.
If the selector lever is inadvertently (due to
a defect or incorrect operation) moved out of P or
N into gear without pressing the brake, this gear
will start to “flash” and no power transmission is
built up. To drive off, press the brake and move
the selector lever from P or N into the required
gear again.
If there is a fault in the transmission:
Selector-lever position R or D is flashing
in the instrument cluster
f Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
f Effects:
There is no power transmission.
The selector lever was engaged without
pressing the footbrake or only the restricted
driving programme is available when the
“Transmission emergency run” message
is displayed.
Indicator for selector lever position and
engaged gear
When the engine is running, the selector lever
position and engaged gear are indicated.
If the selector lever is between two positions
– Effects:
The corresponding selector-lever position in
the instrument panel flashes and the warning
“Actuate brake” or “Selector lever not
engaged” appears on the on-board computer.
– The warning “Transmission emergency run” in
white or red lettering or the warning “Transmission temperature too high” is displayed on the
on-board computer.
Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 184.
Action required:
Press the footbrake and engage the required
selector-lever position again by moving the
selector lever from P or N.
If reverse gear fails:
Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
PROGRAM” on Page 184.
f Action required:
Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.
Shifting Gears
179
Selector lever positions
D - Automatic selection mode
P – Parking lock
Select position D for “normal” driving. The gears
are shifted automatically according to the accelerator position and speed.
f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is
stationary.
If selector-lever position P is flashing in the
instrument cluster, the parking brake is not
engaged. The vehicle can roll away.
Engage selector-lever position P again by
moving the selector lever out of R.
f Engage parking lock after applying the
handbrake and release it before releasing the
handbrake.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in
selector lever position P.
R – Reverse gear
f Select only if car is stationary and the brake is
applied.
N – Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Only select the desired position for driving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
180
Shifting Gears
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven
(economical, comfortable or sporty driving style)
and on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gearchanging points are shifted towards higher or
lower engine-speed ranges.
The accelerator position, driving speed, engine
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
the road profile all have an influence on the gearchanging characteristic.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
pedal.
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward
changes on bends are not made until the enginespeed limit is reached.
Under braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the PDK transmission changes down
earlier.
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is
engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes
before the bend. The bend is taken in the right
gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you
do not have to change down.
With a sporty driving style, downshifts are already
initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly.
This further enhances a dynamic driving style.
The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the
sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest
possible gear-changing points, if the accelerator
pedal is pressed quickly. The transmission accordingly shifts down immediately by one or two gears
(temporary change-down).
The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at
high driving speeds.
Sport mode
(“Sport” and “Sport Plus” modes)
“Sport” mode activated:
The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gearchanging map and shortens the gear shifting
times.
A sporty driving style is recognised more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
Downshifts are already carried out in the case of
slight decelerations, even at higher engine
speeds.
“Sport Plus” mode activated:
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
changes to a shift program designed for driving
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
The gear-changing performance is enhanced
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode.
f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE” on
Page 61.
Driving with Launch Control
Driving with Launch Control allows you to achieve
maximum acceleration from a standing start. It is
intended to provide you with a unique enjoyment of
your vehicle under controlled circumstances and
is not intended to be used in any location where it
could be a nuisance to other persons.
Warning!
There is a risk of endangering other road
users if you use this Control in an improper
location or in a situation where other persons
might need to take evasive action due to the
rapid acceleration that this technology
permits.
f Launch Control is designed to be used in a
controlled environment on closed circuit
driving courses where no vehicle cross traffic
or pedestrian traffic is present.
f Use Launch Control only if conditions permit it
to be applied in a safe manner.
f Do not use Launch Control if there is a possibility it could endanger other persons. Such a
possibility exists if you cannot see that you
have a clear road with no possibility of cross
traffic in your intended direction of driving.
Caution!
Stress on components increases dramatically
when starting with maximum acceleration in
comparison with normal driving off. Use of
Launch Control will inevitably reduce the life
of the engaged engine and transmission
components.
Preconditions:
– Launch Control should only be used when the
engine has reached operating temperature.
– “Sport Plus” mode must be switched on (lightemitting diode in button is on and “SPORT
PLUS” is displayed on the on-board computer).
1. Press the brake with your left foot.
2. Quickly press down the accelerator fully
(kickdown activated) and hold.
The engine speed will flatten out at around
6500 rpm.
“Launch Control active” is displayed on the
on-board computer.
3. Release the brake within a few seconds.
Remaining stationary for a long time with
“Launch Control active” can lead to overloading of the transmission.
In order to protect the transmission, the engine
power is then reduced and the “Launch Control
active” process is cancelled.
Shifting gears on the steering wheel
With the shift buttons on the steering wheel, you
can change temporarily from automatic selection
mode D to manual mode M.
For example:
– Shifting down before bends and on entering
built-up areas.
– Shifting down on downward slopes
(engine braking).
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
Manual selection mode remains engaged:
– for cornering (depending on the lateral acceleration) and overrunning,
– when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a
junction).
The system leaves manual selection mode:
– automatically after approx. 8 seconds (unless
cornering or overrunning),
– after driving off.
Shifting Gears
181
Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
positions D and M.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when
overtaking, depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.
M – Manual selection mode
The currently selected gear is retained when you
change from D to M.
Shifting up +
f Press the PDK selector lever or shift button on
the steering wheel forward.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.
Shifting down –
The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the
top steering wheel spokes allow you to comfortably and reliably select the seven forward gears.
You can shift up or down by the corresponding
number of gears by quickly pressing or pulling the
shift buttons or selector lever several times in
succession.
f Pull the PDK selector lever or shift button on
the steering wheel back.
The transmission can be shifted up or down by
several gears in succession by continuously
operating the selector lever or shift buttons.
182
Shifting Gears
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
you can shift up or down at any time.
Failure of the selector lever display on the
instrument cluster
Gear changes which would exceed the upper or
lower engine speed limit are not executed by the
controller.
The warning “Transmission emergency run” is
displayed in red on the on-board computer.
There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine
speed limit in selector lever position M. Upshift
suppression can be cancelled by kickdown operation. If, for example, the engine speed limit is
reached during overtaking and the automatic
upshift does not occur, the transmission in this
case shifts up as a result of kickdown operation.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
In order to shift up automatically at the upper
engine speed limit:
f Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the fullthrottle point (kickdown).
– Effect:
No selector lever position is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immediately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 259.
Stopping
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
selector lever in drive position and hold the
vehicle with the brake pedal.
f Do not hold the car on a slope using the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
handbrake instead.
f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
handbrake and move the selector lever to
position P.
Parking
f Go easy on the accelerator!
f When parking or manoeuvring in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of the
footbrake.
Driving in winter
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
steep inclines in manual mode. This prevents gear
changes occurring that could cause wheelspin.
Tow-starting, towing
f Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 259.
Shifting Gears
183
Reduced driving program
If there is a fault in the transmission
– Depending on priority, the warning “Transmission emergency run” in white or red lettering or
the warning “Transmission temperature too
high” is displayed on the on-board computer.
Warning “Transmission emergency run” white
– Effects:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
Reverse gear may not function.
Remedy:
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
184
Shifting Gears
Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
– Effect:
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
stop.
Remedy:
It is not possible to continue driving. Immediately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
– Effects:
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
the engine power may be restricted.
Remedy:
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
to run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.
Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ......................................... 186
Coolant Level ............................................ 187
Engine Oil ................................................ 188
Engine Oil Level ....................................... 189
Engine Oil Recommendation ....................... 190
Brake Fluid Level ....................................... 192
Fuel Economy ........................................... 194
Operating your Porsche in other Countries .. 194
Fuel Recommendations .............................. 196
Portable Fuel Containers ........................... 197
Fuel Evaporation Control ........................... 197
Emission Control System ........................... 198
How Emission Control Works ..................... 199
Washer Fluid ............................................. 200
Power Steering .......................................... 201
Air Filter ................................................... 201
Combination Filter ..................................... 201
Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission
and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ............ 201
Wiper Blades ........................................... 202
Car Care Instructions ................................ 203
Maintenance, Car Care
185
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cautious of such devices such as hot water heaters which ignite a flame intermittently.
f Before working on any part in the engine compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
186
Maintenance, Car Care
f In particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.),
jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in
the engine-compartment.
The fans can start or continue running as a
function of temperature, even with the engine
switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ignition system. When the ignition is on, high
voltage is present in all wires connected with
the ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme caution when working on any part of the
engine while the ignition is on or the engine is
running.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
f When working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your
authorized Porsche dealer.
Improper maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your Porsche warranty coverage.
f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appropriate regulations.
f Some countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried in your vehicle.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Coolant Level
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 186.
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a
permanent coolant.
It provides year-round protection from corrosion
and freezing down to –31 °F/–35 °C.
f Only use antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
Checking coolant level
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is located
in the rear luggage compartment under the service flap.
f Check the coolant level regularly.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the
fluid level must lie between the “MIN” and “MAX”
markings.
Topping off coolant
Warning!
Danger of serious personal injury or death
from scalding. Coolant is hazardous to your
health, and may be fatal if swallowed.
f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank
while the engine is hot.
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
f Keep coolant out of children’s reach.
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.
They can be attracted to it should there be a
spill, or to used coolant left in an open container. Coolant can be deadly to pets if consumed.
Risk of damage from overflowing coolant.
2. Press catch button on the service flap and
open flap.
f Take care while topping off coolant not to soil
the luggage compartment or items of luggage.
3. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick rag.
Open cap slowly and carefully and allow overpressure to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
1. Switch engine off and let it cool.
Please see the chapter “COOLING SYSTEM” on
Page 88.
4. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
equal parts, and do not exceed the ”Max.“
mark.
Antifreeze in coolant:
50% gives protection down to –31 °F/–35 °C
60% gives protection down to –58 °F/–50 °C
5. Screw cap firmly on.
6. Close service flap.
Maintenance, Car Care
187
If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
cooling system.
The cause should immediately be remedied at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
Engine-compartment blower,
radiator fan
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in the
engine compartment.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the enginecompartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on temperature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the engine switched off.
188
Maintenance, Car Care
Engine Oil
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in
accordance with the intervals specified in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the
lubricant.
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
measurement may not show any drop in the oil
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or
more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear
that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
the oil should be checked more frequently, as
driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
consumption.
Topping off engine oil
– The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
regularly and kept at the required level.
f Keep engine oil out of children’s reach.
– Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
checked at every fuel filling.
– The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
indicator.
The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
engine damage may be occuring when lit, if engine rpm is above idle speed.
Engine Oil Level
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 186.
f Regularly check the oil level using the on-board
computer after the vehicle is refuelled.
Please see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 161.
The difference between the minimum and maximum marks on the segment display is approx.
1.3 quarts (1.25 liters).
Each segment of the display corresponds to approx. 0.42 quart (0.4 liter).
Warning!
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals.
f Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Caution!
Risk of damage from overflowing engine oil.
f Take care while checking and topping up
engine oil not to soil the luggage compartment
or items of luggage.
Note
The Check Engine warning light may light up if the
cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the
engine is running.
The oil inlet opening is located in the rear luggage
compartment under the service flap.
1. Measure the oil level and read off the required
top-up quantity on the on-board computer.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Press catch button on the service flap and
open flap.
4. Unscrew the oil filler cap.
5. Add at most 0.5 quarts (0.5 liter) of engine oil
at a time.
Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the max. mark.
6. Close oil filler cap until you feel it reach its end
position.
7. Measure oil level again with the on-board
computer. Switch off the engine.
8. If necessary, repeat the process and add more
engine oil as required.
Maintenance, Car Care
189
Engine Oil Recommendation
Porsche recommends
.
The right oil for your vehicle.
Complies with
approval1)
Viscosity class2)
Porsche A40
SAE 0W - 403)
SAE 5W - 404)
SAE 5W - 504)
you can find details of the
manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as
a notice displayed by the retailer.
The current approval status is also available from
your Porsche partner.
2)
SAE viscosity class - Example: SAE 0W - 40
Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for
low temperatures (winter).
Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for
high temperatures.
For all temperature ranges.
4) For the temperature range over --13 °F (--25
190
Maintenance, Car Care
Oil change
– Use engine oils approved by Porsche only. This
is a precondition for optimum and problem-free
operation of your vehicle.
The engine oil has to be changed regularly at the
intervals listed in your Maintenance Schedule.
– Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
It is important that the service intervals,
particularly the oil change intervals, are
observed in accordance with the specifications
in the “Maintenance” booklet.
1) Generally,
3)
Always observe the following points:
°C).
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 271.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the required oils and the necessary filling equipment.
– Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with
each other.
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your
dealer check it out immediately.
– Porsche engines are designed so that no oil
additives may be used.
All current engine oils are compatible with each
other, i.e. when making an oil change it is not necessary to flush the engine if you wish to use a different brand or grade of oil.
Since, however, each brand of oil has a special
composition, you should, if possible, use the
same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up
between oil changes.
– A label is located in the engine compartment,
which provides you with information on suitable
oil for your engine.
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to
advise you.
Porsche engines have long intervals between oil
changes. You can make best use of these long oil
change intervals by using multigrade oils since
these are largely independent of seasonal fluctuations in temperature.
If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
be properly warmed up.
Condensation from products of combustion may
accumulate in the oil. In this case, it is advisable
to change the oil more frequently so that your engine once again has 100% efficient engine oil.
Engine oil performance class
Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves
to keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt
which penetrates into the engine through combustion and to protect the engine against corrosion.
To perform these functions, the oil is provided with
additives which have been specially developed for
these functions.
The efficiency of an oil is expressed, for example,
by the API, ILSAC or ACEA classifications.
Viscosity
Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
(measured at temperatures below 32 °F/0 °C) the
SAE class is given as a number and the letter “W”
(as in winter), for hot viscosity (measured at
212 °F/100 °C) the SAE class is given only as a
number.
The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
oils with only one viscosity are termed singlegrade oils.
Single-grade oils can not be used in your engine.
The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche
has to be chosen according to the ambient temperature given in the engine oil recommendation
table.
Maintenance, Car Care
191
Brake Fluid Level
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 186.
f Use only new (unused) Original Porsche
brake fluid.
Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of children’s reach.
f Take care while topping off brake fluid not to
soil the luggage compartment or items of luggage.
Checking the brake fluid level
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch
systems is located in the luggage compartment.
1. Open and remove cover flap A.
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the
transparent expansion tank through the
window B.
The fluid level should always lie between the
minimum and maximum marks.
192
Maintenance, Car Care
A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
normal.
If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
developed a leak.
f Have the brake system checked without delay
at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Changing the brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boiling point and, under certain operating conditions,
can affect the braking performance.
Therefore have the brake fluid changed in accordance with the change intervals stated in the
brochure “Maintenance”.
Warning light USA
Warning light Canada
– The warning lights on the instrument panel and
on the on-board computer indicate an insufficient brake fluid level.
– If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.
If the warning lights should light up when
driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Do not continue driving.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Maintenance, Car Care
193
Fuel Economy
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
when and how you drive, optional equipment
installed, and the general condition of your
car.
A car tuned to specifications and correctly
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal
fuel economy.
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications.
Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
engine “breathing”.
Battery should be fully charged.
Wheels should be properly aligned.
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure.
f Always monitor your fuel consumption.
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible.
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops.
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
f Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer
periods.
194
Maintenance, Car Care
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle reduces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
Operating your Porsche in other
Countries
f Organize your trips to take in several errands
in one trip.
Government regulations in the United States and
Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
vehicles sold in other countries.
f All electrical accessories contribute to increased fuel consumption.
f Only switch on the air conditioning when necessary.
f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System
mounted unless you need it.
The EPA estimated mpg. is to be used for
comparison purposes, actual mileage may
be different from the estimated mpg.,
depending on your driving speed, weather
conditions and trip length. Your actual
highway mileage will probably be less than
the estimated mpg.
f Please observe all local and national speed
limits.
If you plan to take your Porsche outside the continental limits of the United States or Canada, there
is the possibility that
– unleaded fuel may not be available;
– unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Excessive engine knock and serious damage to both engine and catalytic converters could result;
– service may be inadequate due to lack of proper service facilities, tools or diagnostic equipment;
– replacement parts may not be available or very
difficult to get.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
mechanical damage that could result
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
availability.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about shipping and forwarding requirements, as well as current import and customs regulations.
Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapors.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
f Please see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” on
Page 194.
Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 198.
Please see the chapter “LEVEL GAGE” on
Page 130.
Check engine warning light
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and onboard computer come on and remain on while
driving, it suggests:
– refueling with engine running.
Opening the filler flap
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
right fender.
If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
system:
f Open the passenger door.
f Pull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
(arrow).
f With the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.
The filler flap is centrally locked along with the other locks.
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or
Maintenance, Car Care
195
1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the
ignition.
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
Hang the tank cap's plastic strap on the hook
on the inside wall of the filler flap.
3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
down.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly operated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has
switched off.
Fuel could spray or could run over in warm
temperatures.
Refueling
Fuel tank capacity is listed under “Capacities”.
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel additives.
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 271.
196
Maintenance, Car Care
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after
refueling and turn it until you hear it and feel it
engage.
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace it
only with an original part to reduce the
possibility of a fire in the event of a collision.
Caution!
Risk of damage. Decorative film may fade
if it comes into contact with fuel.
f Wipe off any emerging fuel immediately.
Fuel Recommendations
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic converters and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY.
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s “Electronic
Oktane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
It is important to observe the regular service intervals, and particularly the oil change intervals,
specified in the “Maintenance” booklet.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
important to the life of the catalytic
converters. Deposits from leaded fuels will
ruin the converters and make it ineffective
as an emission control device.
Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we recommend you do not take your car to areas or
countries where unleaded fuel may not be available.
Octane ratings
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist detonation. Therefore, buying the correct octane gas
is important to prevent engine “damage”.
The RON octane rating is based on the research
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council octane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane rating
usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is calculated
as research octane number plus motor octane
number, divided by 2, that is written as:
RON+MON
2
or
R+M
2
The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than
the RON rating:
For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI
Fuels containing ethanol
Fuel Evaporation Control
Do not use any fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Fuel tank venting
We recommend, however, to change to a different
fuel or station if any of the following problems occur with your vehicle:
– Deterioration of driveability and performance.
– Substantially reduced fuel economy.
– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially
at high altitude or at high temperature.
– Engine malfunction or stalling.
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or result in fire in case of an accident.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable containers in your vehicle.
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
Vapor control system and storage
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.
Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.
Maintenance, Car Care
197
Emission Control System
In the interest of clean air
Pollution of our environment has become a problem that is of increasing concern to all of us. We
urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in
controlling the pollutants emitted from the automobile.
Porsche has developed an emission control system that controls or reduces those parts of the
emission that can be harmful to our environment.
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in
your new car under the terms and conditions set
forth in the Warranty Booklet.
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
responsibility to provide regular maintenance service for the vehicle and to keep a record of all maintenance work performed. To facilitate record
keeping, have the service performed by authorized Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
efficient service.
198
Maintenance, Car Care
To assure efficient operation of the Emission
Control System:
f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in
accordance with the recommendations described in your Maintenance Booklet.
Lack of proper maintenance, as well as improper use of the vehicle, will impair the function of the emission control system and could
lead to damage.
f Do not alter or remove any component of the
emission control system.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
etc., which are designed to protect your vehicle’s emission control system.
In addition to serious engine damage, this can
result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the
exhaust system.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire or other unusual operating conditions.
Parking
Warning!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable material.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.
Undercoating
Danger!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rustproofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
How Emission Control Works
Oxygen sensor
When an automobile engine is running, it uses energy generated through the combustion of a mixture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not
be burned completely, but may be discharged into
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additonal hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank.
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the
air, contribute to undesirable pollution.
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
continuously senses the oxygen content of the
exhaust and signals the information to an electronic control unit. The control unit corrects the air/
fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an accurately metered air/fuel mixture.
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion process and discharged into the exhaust system.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions.
Crankcase ventilation
Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emissions from the engine crankcase are not permitted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to the
air intake system. From here the emissions mix
with the intake air and are later burned in the engine.
The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
– push or tow starting the vehicle
– misfiring of the engine
– turning off the ignition while the vehicle is moving or
– driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
– by other unusual operating conditions.
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
the catalytic converters. This could result in
overheating of the converters. Federal law prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
Catalytic converters
The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehicle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.
The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critically important for the life of the catalytic converters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.
Maintenance, Car Care
199
Clean water is generally not enough to clean the
windshield and headlights. Depending on the
season, mix the water with the appropriate
additives. Follow the instructions for the mixture
ratio.
Only use window cleaner concentrate which meets
the following requirements.
– Dilutability 1:100
– Phosphate-free
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses.
– Without headlight cleaning system:
approximately 2.6 quarts (2.5 liters).
Water + antifreeze protection + window cleaner
concentrate at the mixing ratio indicated on the
container.
Maintenance, Car Care
f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
in the washer reservoir.
Warning light
f Add washer fluid.
Winter filling
200
3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
Summer filling
Capacity
The reservoir, with a blue screw cap, is in the front
luggage compartment, to the rear left.
2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir (arrow).
If less than 0.53 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
warning message appears on the on-board
computer.
Water + window cleaner concentrate at the mixing
ratio indicated on the container.
Washer fluid
1. Please note all the information on the refill container of the cleaning agent.
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche
dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Washer Fluid
– With headlight cleaning system:
approximately 6.3 quarts (6 liters).
Topping off washer fluid
f Please note all the information on the containers of the window cleaner concentrate or the
antifreeze protection.
Power Steering
Warning!
Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when being
towed) or the hydraulic system fails, there is
no assistance for steering.
Therefore, substantially more force will have
to be exerted in order to steer.
f Exercise great care when being towed.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
Note
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is system
related and does not indicate a defect in the
steering system.
Checking hydraulic fluid
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 186.
Air Filter
A dirty air filter not only reduces engine performance, but can lead to premature engine wear.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
f In dusty conditions, check the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary.
Combination Filter
The fresh air passing through the combination filter into the passenger compartment is virtually
free of dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the circulating-air button.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow:
f Have filter replaced by your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.
Fluids/Oils for Manual
Transmission and Porsche
Doppelkupplung (PDK)
The transmission fluids/oils have to be checked
and changed at the intervals listed in your Maintenance Schedule.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 271.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without fluid/
oil in the transmission. The transmission may be
damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only a clean
funnel or spout must be used when adding fluid/
oil.
We recommend that you have the fluids/oils
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the required lubricants and the necessary filling equipment.
f If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
have your authorized Porsche dealer check it
out immediately.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Regular checking of hydraulic fluid is part of
servicing.
Maintenance, Car Care
201
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (before and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates.
Caution!
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally
falls back on to the window.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when replacing the wiper blade.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are frozen in place are loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
Maintenance note
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with window cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner. If
they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
202
Maintenance, Car Care
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the windshield. These wax residues can be removed
only by using window cleaner concentrate.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
– Replace damaged or worn wiper blades as
soon as possible.
– Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 200.
f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
Changing wiper blades
f Please read the separate instructions for fitting
wiper blades as supplied by the manufacturer.
f We recommend that you get your authorized
Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
If the wiper blades are not changed properly,
they can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check that the wiper blades are seated
securely. The wiper blades must engage
properly in the wiper arm.
Car Care Instructions
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 186.
Regular and correct care helps to maintain
the value of your car and is also a
precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty.
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially
developed car-care products from the
Porsche program available either singly or
as complete car-care sets. They will be
pleased to help you select suitable products.
Whether you use Porsche products or other
commercially available cleaning agents first
make sure of their correct application.
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
owner is willing to give the car.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
the vehicle or property.
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
health.
Most chemical cleaners are concentrates
which require dilution. High concentrations
might cause problems ranging from irritation
to serious injury as well as damage to your
vehicle.
f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from children.
f Observe all caution labels.
f Always read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may contain information necessary to avoid personal
injury.
f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis, fenders, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
on sharp-edged metal parts.
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect braking efficiency.
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.
Decorative film
Caution!
Risk of damage due to separation of the
decorative film when cleaning your vehicle
with high-pressure cleaning equipment or
steam cleaners.
High-pressure cleaning units, steam
cleaners
Warning!
High-pressure cleaning units or steam cleaners can damage the following components:
– tires,
– logos, emblems,
– painted surfaces,
– alternator,
– ParkAssist sensors.
f Please observe the operating instructions from
the unit manufacturer.
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like,
maintain a minimum distance of 20 inches (50
cm).
f Never use high-pressure cleaning units or
steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. A highpressure cleaning unit or steam cleaners with
round nozzle will damage your vehicle.
f The tires are particularly susceptible to damage.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
the aforementioned components.
f Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment
or steam cleaners for cleaning decorative film.
Maintenance, Car Care
203
Washing
The best method of protecting your car from the
damaging effects of the environment is frequent
washing and the application of a preservative. The
underside of your vehicle should also be thoroughly washed for cinders, salt or sanding at winter’s
end.
The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust,
dead insects, bird droppings or substances from
trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful effect.
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark
paint finishes show up the smallest of surface
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter
colors.
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratching because of the composition of their pigments
and require particularly careful paint care.
f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
the bodywork is still hot.
f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a
soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car
shampoo.
f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with water to rinse away loose dirt.
204
Maintenance, Car Care
f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of water and then dry with a chamois leather.
Do not use the same chamois leather for drying as you use for cleaning the windshield and
windows.
Warning!
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during
a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
make the brakes pull unevenly which could
increase the danger of an accident, causing
serious personal injuries or death.
f After washing the car, test the brakes and
steering and briefly brake the discs dry.
When doing this, take care not to hamper other
road users behind you (traffic conditions
permitting).
Automatic car washes
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
Page 202.
Optional add-on parts or parts which project
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be
damaged by design features (e.g. brushes) of automatic car washes.
The following parts are particularly
susceptible to damage:
– Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermittent or sensor operation)
– External antennas (always unscrew)
– Rear spoiler
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
height, the greater the risk of damage)
– High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from getting scratched, do not clean with the wheelcleaning brushes of the car wash).
f Please consult the operator before using automatic car washes.
f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
door sills.
Note
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.
Door lock
Preservation
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
the cold season, the lock cylinder should be
covered during a wash.
The paint surface becomes dull over time due
to weathering.
f Should the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
Never use excessive force.
f Apply paint preservative after washing the
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the
paintwork.
Paint
To protect the paint on your vehicle in the best
possible way against mechanical and chemical
damage, you should
– preserve it regularly,
– polish it if necessary,
– remove spots and stains, and
– repair damaged paintwork.
f Do not apply care products containing silicone
to the convertible top and windows.
General information
f Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth,
because the grains of dirt will damage the
paintwork.
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt
effect will be lost.
f Preserve paint regularly.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating
the paint.
Polishing
Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it becomes evident that the normal preservatives no
longer produce the desired finish.
Spots and stains
f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
insects as soon as possible with Insect Remover. They can cause discoloration if allowed to
remain on the paintwork.
f Wash the affected area immediately after treating it.
Minor paint damage
f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
scores or chips caused by flying stones, repaired immediately by your authorized
Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in.
However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
they must first be removed carefully and thoroughly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and
finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color
number are found on the data bank in the Maintenance booklet.
f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE DATA BANK”
on Page 264.
Engine compartment
The engine compartment and the surface of the
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the
factory.
If degreasing solvents are used to clean the engine compartment or the engine is washed down,
the process almost invariably removes the corrosion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely necessary to have a durable preservative applied to all
surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies in
the engine compartment. This also applies when
corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced.
Maintenance, Car Care
205
Caution!
Risk of damage to the alternator.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at the alternator, or cover the alternator.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If the vehicle is
driven frequently in areas where salt has been
spread on the roads, the engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly and subsequently
sealed after the cold weather season to prevent
salt from causing any lasting damage.
Windows
The road dust which settles on the windshield and
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil
residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which collect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
are augmented by impurities in the air which enters the car through the fresh air vents.
f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
with Porsche window cleaner.
f If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
pick up a certain amount of preservative or
polish and could smear the windows and thus
impair vision.
f Remove dead insects with Porsche insect remover.
206
Maintenance, Car Care
Note
Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydrophobic) coating which prevents soiling of the
windows.
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
renewed.
f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Wiper blades
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
Page 202.
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (before and after the cold season) or whenever
wiper performance deteriorates or the blades
are damaged.
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the
vehicle has been washed in a car wash.
If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
These wax residues can be removed only by
using window cleaner concentrate.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
– Replace damaged or worn wiper blades immediately.
f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Page 200.
f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
The wiper blades may be damaged:
f Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
possible.
Undercoating
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it
is advisable to have the underside of the car inspected at certain intervals – preferably before
the start of winter and again in spring – and the undercoating restored as necessary.
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the necessary equipment for applying factory approved
materials. We recommend that you entrust them
with such work and inspections.
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials applied at the factory.
Warning!
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rustproofing on or near the exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully
remove any deposits of dirt and grease. Once
it has dried, the new undercoating compound
forms a tough protective coating which
provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor
panels and components.
f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable preservative to unprotected areas after cleaning
the underside of the body, the transmission,
the engine or carrying out repairs to underbody, engine or transmission components.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If your car is driven frequently in areas where salt has been spread
on the roads, the whole engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time.
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes
Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolor due
to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues.
The original polish can be achieved again using
commercially available metal polishing paste or
metal polish.
Light alloy wheels
f Please see the chapter “WASHING” on
Page 204.
Warning!
Danger of accident resulting in serious personal injury or death if cleaning agents (e.g.
wheel cleaning agents) come into contact
with the brake discs.
Metal particles (such as brass or copper in brake
dust) must not remain too long on alloy wheels.
Contact corrosion can cause pitting.
Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or the
wrong pH value, as are commonly used for other
metals, as well as mechanical tools and products,
will damage the oxide layer and are therefore
unsuitable.
f Use only cleaners for alloy wheels
(pH value 9.5). Products with the wrong
pH value can destroy the protective layer
on the wheels.
We recommend Porsche cleaner for alloy rims.
f If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks
with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels
are exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust,
weekly cleaning is necessary.
The resulting film on the brake discs can impair braking performance.
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
contact with the brake discs.
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
discs with a strong jet of water.
f Paying attention to any road users behind you,
dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at
short intervals.
Maintenance, Car Care
207
Door, lid and window seals
Caution!
The lubricant coating on the inner door
seals, convertible top and hardtop seals
may be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and
care agents.
f Gently wipe the surface without applying too
much pressure.
f Do not clean when dry.
f Never use other chemical cleaners or
solvents.
f Remove heavy contamination with a leather
cleaner.
Always read the instructions for use given on
the containers.
We recommend Porsche leather cleaner.
f Do not use any chemical cleaning agents
or solvents.
Leather
f Treat cleaned leather only with a leather
care product.
We recommend the Porsche leather
care product.
f Do not use any preservative agents.
Characteristics and special features
Cleaning airbags covers
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, structural differences and slight variations in shade and
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leather product.
There is a danger of serious personal injury
or death if the airbag system is impaired by
improper cleaning work.
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and
grit) from all seals regularly using warm
soapy water.
f If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door
seals and lid seals against freezing into place
with a suitable care product.
Headlights, lights, interior and exterior
plastic parts, adhesive films
Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
detergent to clean light lenses, plastic headlight
lenses, plastic parts, adhesive films and surfaces.
Do not clean when dry.
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. Gently
wipe the surface without applying too much
pressure.
An interior window cleaner can also be used to
clean plastic surfaces (always read the cleaning
instructions on the container). We recommend
Porsche interior window cleaner.
208
Maintenance, Car Care
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
Observe the following care instructions:
Caution!
The leather will be damaged by the use of
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by
incorrect treatment.
f Do not use caustic cleaners or hard
cleaning aids.
f Perforated leather must under no
circumstances get wet on its reverse side.
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
cloth or a commercially available
microfibre cloth.
Danger!
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on
individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, passenger side
instrument panel, the front seats and the door
linings.
f Let your authorized Porsche dealer clean
these components.
Fabric, upholstery, carpets and
floor-mats
f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff
brush.
f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain
remover.
To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accessories includes mats of the correct size and with the
appropriate fastening.
Warning!
Risk of an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Always check the movement of the pedals before driving and make sure that they are not obstructed by a floor-mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle - do not install them
loosely in the vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
nonskid floor-mats of the correct size.
Cleaning fabric linings
Cleaning safety belts
f Fabric linings on pillars, convertible top liner
and sun blinds, etc. must be cleaned only
using suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry
foam and a soft brush.
f Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
Alcantara
f Do not use a leather care product to clean
Alcantara.
f When drying, avoid direct sunlight.
f Only use suitable cleaning agents.
f Do not tint or bleach the belts.
The belt fabric could be weakened, thus affecting safety.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
with a soft brush.
Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
a lasting change in the surface.
Cleaning when lightly soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
solution and wipe off the dirt.
Cleaning when heavily soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
outside in.
Maintenance, Car Care
209
Storing your Porsche
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
most suitable and necessary methods.
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and outside.
Clean the engine compartment.
The under carriage and chassis components
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
f Fill up the fuel tank.
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
for several minutes.
f Increase the tire pressure to 50 psi (3.5 bar).
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
piston shafts.
The vehicle should be moved slightly, approximately every four weeks, to prevent flat spot
on the tires.
Climate control
The air conditioning system should be in good
working condition and fully charged.
Windshield/Headlight washer
f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution
level as necessary.
Electrical system
f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
Do not fast charge the battery.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 239.
Vehicle interior
The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (SilicaGel) is recommended in vehicles with leather interior and in areas with high humidity. The recommended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
(500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.
210
Maintenance, Car Care
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ........................................ 212
Tires/Wheels ........................................... 213
Loading Information ................................... 224
Wheel Bolts ............................................. 226
Changing a wheel ...................................... 227
Flat Tire .................................................... 229
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage Lift ........................................... 232
Spacers ................................................... 233
Electrical System ..................................... 235
Battery .................................................... 239
Replacing the remote-control battery ......... 244
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ..... 245
Bulb chart ................................................. 247
Lights, Replacing Bulbs ............................. 247
Headlights ................................................ 248
Number Plate Light .................................... 256
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and
Long-Life Bulbs ......................................... 256
Adjusting Headlights .................................. 257
Towing ..................................................... 259
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
211
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
Ignoring the following instructions may
cause serious personal injury or death.
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do
not attempt the adjustments described on the
following pages.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel
fumes might be present. Be especially cautious of such devices such as hot water heaters which ignite a flame intermittently.
f Before working on any part in the engine compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all
times while the engine is running.
If work has to be performed with the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
212
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
f In particular, be very careful to ensure that
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.),
jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
belts or other moving parts.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
of the car.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in
the engine-compartment.
The fans can start or continue running as a
function of temperature, even with the engine
switched off.
Carry out work in these areas only with the engine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise
extreme caution.
f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ignition system. When the ignition is on, high voltage is present in all wires connected with the
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
caution when working on any part of the engine
while the ignition is on or the engine is running.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
is necessary to work under the car.
Jacks are not suitable for this kind of work.
f When working under the car without safety
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the
wheels are blocked, and that the engine
cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
the battery or fuel.
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by your authorized Porsche dealer.
Improper maintenance during the warranty period may affect your Porsche warranty coverage.
f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
coolant, are hazardous to your health.
Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
dispose of them in accordance with the appropriate regulations.
f Some countries require additional tools and
special spare parts to be carried.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
Tires/Wheels
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
For your safety remember the following:
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit
your Porsche.
– If you intend to use other than original equipment wheels, be sure that they conform to
Porsche specifications for your model.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...)
can be mounted.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory
installed equipment will affect the safe operation of your vehicle.
– Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your
dealer has the technical information necessary
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts
are compatible with the original factory installations.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
injury or death.
f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a sudden vibration or ride disturbance, and/or you
suspect that possible damage to your tires or
vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and inspect the tires.
If you cannot determine the cause for the disturbance, have your vehicle towed to the nearest Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
f Continuing to operate the vehicle without correction could result in a loss of control and
serious personal injury.
Example
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specific government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
213
and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
not include cornering (turned) traction, acceleration, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
214
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Tire pressures
Warning!
Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
wear and adversely affects road handling.
This could lead to tire failure, resulting in loss
of control, leading to serious personal injury
or death.
f Always use an accurate tire pressure gage
when checking inflation pressures.
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure listed on the tire sidewall.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLATE” on Page 265.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
(68 °F/20 °C), when adjusting the inflation
pressure.
Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measuring cold pressures, since the pressures would
rise from temperature influence.
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage.
Always screw caps tightly down.
Replace missing caps immediately.
f Use only plastic valve caps.
f Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche
approved tire sealant.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (TPM)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPM is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM low tire pressure telltale.
f On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring:
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 151.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased.
f Never let air out of hot tires.
This could cause the tire pressure to fall below
the prescribed value.
Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subsequently correcting the tire pressure.
Overloading
Danger!
Risk of damage to vehicle parts, loss of control and serious personal injury or death.
f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
the roof load.
f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be
found on the tire pressure plate and in the
chapter technical data.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Example of a tire pressure plate
Tire pressure plate
Information on the tire pressure plate
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, including the driver.
f Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMATION” on Page 224.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
215
B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum weight of passengers
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMATION” on Page 224.
C Tire size for the front axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
D Recommended tire pressure for the front axle
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
E Tire size for the rear axle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer
about the current release status.
F Recommended tire pressure for the rear axle.
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel:
Size and tire pressure of the spare wheel.
216
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Tire traction
Warning!
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a
wedge of water may build up between the
tires and the road. This phenomenon is
known as “hydroplane” and may cause partial or complete loss of traction, vehicle
control or stopping ability.
f Reduce speed on wet surface to prevent this.
Tire life
Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road
surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving
habits, type of tires and tire care.
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
should be balanced or replaced.
Tire wear
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the
tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in.
(1.6 mm).
When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
recommend, however, that you do not let the tires
wear down to this extent.
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly
and are even less effective on wet roads.
Snow tires lose their traction capability when their
tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
In the United States, state laws may govern the
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
laws.
Danger!
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of control of the vehicle and could cause serious
personal injuries or death.
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden
deflation and loss of control which could cause
severe personal injury.
f Specialized high performance tires on high
performance sports cars exhibit more wear
than those on a family sedan, or even a high
performance sedan.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
pressure and condition at least every two
weeks.
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, consult your Porsche dealer.
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.
Tire care
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims.
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
f Check tires for uneven wear and damage
before driving off.
f Remove imbedded material.
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately.
f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires.
f Replace missing valve stem caps.
f Keep tires inflated correctly.
f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
clean inner side of wheels.
f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
f Check wheel rims for corrosion.
f Remove road salt, if driving in winter.
Tire damage, puncture
High-pressure cleaning units can damage the
tires.
f Please see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
CLEANING UNITS, STEAM CLEANERS” on
Page 203.
f Check tires for imbedded material, cuts, punctures, cracks and bulges (side wall) before driving off.
In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain whether there is a break in the ply with all its consequences or tire damage caused by thermal or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
any other prior damage, we recommend that the
tire be replaced for safety reasons.
If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
exceed 30%.
Handling inconsistencies may result.
f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
217
Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pressure increases rate of wear of the affected
tires.
f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or foreign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a damaged tire if necessary.
f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
the inner side) checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Tire replacements
If in doubt, contact your Porsche dealer.
Use only tire makes and types approved by
Porsche.
If you do not use a Porsche recommended
replacement tire, make sure that you
purchase your new tires from a reputable tire
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
Only tires with the same make and with the
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...)
can be mounted.
Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release
status.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There
are currently no standards concerning tire
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h).
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle
at the time.
Only tires of the same make and type must be
used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
218
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
If new tires are installed only on one axle, a noticeable change in handling occurs due to the different
tread depth of the other tires.
This happens especially if only rear tires are replaced. However, this condition disappears as the
new tires are broken in.
f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
Installation of new tires should only be done by a
qualified tire technician.
Valves
Rubber valve stems must be replaced every time
a tire is replaced.
For metal valves, the installation and replacement
instructions must be observed.
f Use only genuine Porsche metal valves.
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
f Use only plastic valve caps.
Parking at the curb
Warning!
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic
islands) are dangerous and may cause hidden tire damage which is not noticeable until
later. Such damage can result in accidents at
high speeds causing serious personal injury
or death.
Depending on the force of impact, the edge
of the rim can also be damaged.
f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage
on the inside.
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise
care when parking along curbs.
Wheel alignment, wheel balancing
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and
snow tires before winter.
Unbalanced wheels may affect car handling and
tire life.
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
balancing.
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning!
If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations
occur that could be caused by damage to
tires or the car, the speed must be reduced
immediately, but without braking sharply.
If you continue your trip without having the
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose
control of your vehicle which could cause serious personal injury or death.
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires.
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors
Before changing wheels, make sure that the
wheels are compatible with your vehicle's TPM.
f Check this with your authorized Porsche
dealer.
Removing and storing tires
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally to 94 ftlb (130 Nm).
Tires must always remain on the same side of
the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of
rotation and position of each wheel should be
marked.
Example
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
their marking.
The perception that tire durability and performance are immune to the effects of storage and
age is unfounded.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber elastic, lose their effectiveness in the course of time
and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
time to time.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
219
Note
Under no circumstances should tires older than 6
years be used on your Porsche.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT”
code number. If, for example, the last four numbers read 1208, then the tire was produced in the
12th week of 2008.
f Store tires in a cool and dry place.
Snow tires
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S
tires with studs.
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
possible restrictions.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or
death.
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture
are optimized for wet and dry driving conditions, and may not prove favorable for snow
conditions.
f Therefore install M+S tires before driving in
such conditions.
220
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Before mounting snow tires, consult with
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical
information necessary to advise you on
wheel and tire compatibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
all four wheels.
Snow tires with studs should be run at moderate
speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.
Danger!
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or
death.
f Make sure they are replaced immediately.
f Do not drive a vehicle equipped with snow tires
at prolonged high speed.
Snow tires do not have the same degree of
traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as a
normal tire.
Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
these conditions.
Comply with all state and local laws
governing snow tire and tread depth
requirements.
Danger!
Risk of accident and serious personal injury
or death due to excessive speed.
f Always check the maximum speed rating on
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tires.
f Fit winter tires to both axles well before the
cold season begins.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased
to advise you.
Maintenance note
We recommend fitting snow tires on the vehicle at
temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since the driving
performance of summer tires is reduced at low
temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently
damaged at extremely low temperatures.
Winter tires lose their traction capability when their
tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
Snow chains
Caution!
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake components.
f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and
only with the tire/rim combination listed in the
Technical Data.
To ensure adequate clearance between chain
and body, Porsche recommends only the use
of fine-link chains such as those approved by
Porsche.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
the chains.
Different states and countries have varying statutory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Check with local authorities for possible restrictions.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.
Fitting snow chains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
snow chains.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
f To fit/remove the spacers:
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on
Page 233.
Tire designations
Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
new designations have come into force for snow
tires for your Porsche.
The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
265/40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/h).
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
221
B TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
– DOT
The DOT symbol indicates that the tires comply with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation and provides information about:
– first two-digit code means manufacturer’s identification mark.
– second two-digit code means tire size.
– third four-digit code means tire type code.
Example of Inscription
Inscription on radial tire
A Tire size
Example: P 295/30 ZR 19 100 Y
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle.
This information is not included on all tires.
– ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds
above 150 mph / 240 km/h
There are currently no standards concerning
tire strength at speeds above 150 mph
(240 km/h).
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition.
D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
– 19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
to which a tire can be inflated.
– 100 - Load capacity coefficient
– 30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio
in percent
– Y - Speed code letter
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
C Tire ply composition and material
– R - Belt type code letter for radial
– 295 - Indication of tire width in mm
222
– fourth four-digit code means date of manufacture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0208, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
of 2008.
– XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load rating
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation
pressure.
E Maximum Load rating
Tip on driving
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating
as the factory installed tire.
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
the tire sidewall.
F Radial
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
structure.
G Term of tubeless or tube tire
Identification for tubeless tires.
f Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
to speed limits and bear this identification.
Inscription on light alloy wheels
Maintenance note
The speed code letter indicates the maximum permissible speed for the tire.
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
Use only plastic valve caps.
Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
of air.
T
=
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Note on operation
H
=
up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
V
=
up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W
=
up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y
=
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
=
up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for
Y tires. Speeds of more than
300 km/h (186 mph) are also
possible at a maximum tire load
capacity of 85 % (confirmation from
tire manufacturer required for
speeds of more than 186 mph (300
km/h)).
Speed code letter
f The rim width in inches A and the rim offset F
are visible from the outside.
The information is inscribed on the back of the
spokes near the tire valve.
ABCDEF-
Rim width in inches
Rim-flange contour code letter
Symbol for drop-center rim
Rim diameter in inches
Double hump
Rim offset in mm
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
223
Loading Information
Definitions
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This
weight does not include passengers and cargo.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo
combined.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage
and optional equipment.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This information is located on the safety compliance sticker
located in the driver’s side door jamb.
For determining the compatibility of the tire and
vehicle load capabilities:
f Please see the chapter “TECHNICAL DATA” on
Page 266.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “100”) is a minimum requirement.
224
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passengers and cargo.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is
the maximum total weight limit specified of the
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
that can be loaded into the vehicle. This information can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight.
The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
The maximum load rating is the load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pressure.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
the load limit.
f Never exceed the permissible limits.
Danger!
Risk of loss of control, damage to the vehicle
and serious personal injury or death.
f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo:
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure).
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture).
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the ”XXX“ amount equals
400 lbs. and there will be two - 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(400 - 300 (2 x 150) = 100 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example for determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo
Vehicle Load Capacity
f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLATE” on Page 265.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
225
f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
f Apply a thin coat of Optimoly TA (aluminum
paste) on the thread and between the bolt head
and movable spherical cap ring (arrows).
The bearing surface of the spherical cap
facing the wheel must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use the Original Porsche wheel bolts specially designed for this vehicle type.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque of wheel bolts:
96 ftlb./130 Nm
Wheel Bolts
Danger!
Risk of wheel bolt breakage and wheel separation, resulting in serious personal injury or
death.
f Follow all instructions concerning wheel bolts.
226
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Wheel Securing Bolts
If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the wrench
socket for the wheel securing bolts along with the
car key.
The wrench socket for the wheel securing bolts is
in the tool box.
To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, a wrench socket with the appropriate
coding must be used between the wheel bolt and
the wheel-bolt spanner.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Changing a wheel
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The
car may slip off the jack.
f Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when
jacking up and changing a wheel.
f Always place the car on stable supports if work
has to be carried out under the car.
Risk of damage to the brake discs of the
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).
f Always screw in both assembly aids when
changing a wheel.
Note
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not supplied with the car.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you.
1. Apply the handbrake fully and engage 1st gear
or PDK selector-lever position P and remove
the ignition key.
4. Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to
be changed.
5. Lift the car only at the specified jacking points.
6. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
ground.
Please see the chapter “LIFTING THE VEHICLE
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR GARAGE LIFT”
on Page 232.
7. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see respective
illustration).
8. Screw in assembly aids instead of the wheel
bolts.
Screw in assembly aid for cars without Porsche Ceramic
Composite Brake
9. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Note on operation
f To remove or mount the spacers:
Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on
Page 233.
2. Switch on the hazard warning lights if necessary.
3. Secure the car against rolling away, e.g. by
means of wedges under the wheels on the opposite side.
This is particularly important on slopes.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
227
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
14.Lower the car fully and remove the jack.
15.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence.
f Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque (96 ftlb./130 Nm).
10.Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on.
Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on
Page 226.
11.Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
12.Remove assembly aids, screw in remaining
wheel bolts.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel
is centred.
13.Inflate the tire if necessary.
228
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gage onto the valve stem.
Note on operation
Note on operation for vehicles with
Tire Pressure Monitoring
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard, reposition the pressure gage.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
3. Read the tire pressure on the gage stem and
compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
This information can be found on the tire pressure plate or in the chapter Technical Data.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
f On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the on-board computer must be
updated after the wheel change.
Screw in two assembly aids for cars with Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake
Checking tire pressure with a
pressure gage
4. Remove the pressure gage.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 151.
Flat Tire
Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions may result
in serious personal injury to you or to bystanders.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and
use other warning devices to alert other motorists. Set the parking brake.
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials.
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
property damage and serious personal injury
or death.
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure
tester are located in the luggage compartment.
f Please observe the safety and operating instructions on the special sealant bottle with a
special Porsche part number and on the compressor – these are essential.
Important note
Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only
an emergency repair. Even with the tire airtight, it may be used only for short journeys
in an emergency.
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h).
f Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles.
Use only the tire sealant located in the luggage
compartment.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
f Have tires replaced by a specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
229
The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure
tester can be found in the luggage compartment.
The tire sealant comprises:
– A filler bottle
– A sticker denoting the maximum permissible
speed for the driver’s field of vision
– A filler hose
– A valve turner and
– A spare valve insert.
Danger!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
A - Filler bottle
B - Filler hose
Tire sealant
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tire tread.
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be
used only for short journeys in an emergency.
230
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm).
f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is damaged.
Warning!
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
to health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant.
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
f Do not inhale vapors, due to consequent harm
to personal health resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
In case of contact with the sealant:
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off immediately.
f Change soiled clothing immediately.
f Get medical attention immediately in the event
of an allergic reaction.
f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
water.
Do not induce vomiting.
Get medical attention immediately.
5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle.
The filler bottle is now open.
16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F.
Note on operation for vehicles with
Tire Pressure Monitoring
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place.
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B.
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire
valve and press it together forcefully until the
bottle is completely emptied into the tire.
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve.
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve
using the valve turner.
ABCDEF-
Filler bottle
Filler hose
Plug of the filler hose
Valve turner
Valve insert
Tire valve
Inserting sealant
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
the tire.
2.Remove compressor, sealant and the
enclosed sticker from the luggage compartment.
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
13.Connect the compressor to the cigarette lighter and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire
pressure.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on Page 267.
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve.
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around
10 minutes.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar),
do not continue driving.
If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is indicated, correct the pressure to the prescribed
value.
17.On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
settings on the on-board computer must be
updated after the wheel change.
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 151.
Care Instructions
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
peeled off like a film.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Have the tire replaced by an authorized
Porsche dealer immediately.
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
f Please always observe the safety and operating instructions, which can be found in the
separate operating instructions for the sealant
and on the compressor.
4.Shake filler bottle A.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
231
Platform lift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, it
must be ensured that there is enough space between the lifting platform and the vehicle.
Garage lift
A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting
Platform or Garage Lift
The car must be raised only at the illustrated jacking points.
Caution!
Serious personal injury or death and/or serious damage to the engine or the vehicle may
occur, if you lift the vehicle improperly.
f Never lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmission or axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
232
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Spacers
Note on operation
f Use the spacers only together with wheels and
fastening parts approved by Porsche.
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
current approval status.
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 227.
f To fit/remove the spacers:
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel
If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.
Fitting snow chains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
snow chains.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
Removing the spacers
1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16) on
the wheel hub.
2. Remove the spacer.
3. Fasten the brake disc with the short M6x12
countersunk screws, part No.:
900.269.047.09.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. For wheel mounting without a spacer, 5 mm
shorter wheel bolts (part No.:
997.361.203.01) must be used.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
233
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 227.
Mounting the spacers
1. Remove wheel.
2. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x12) on
the break disc.
3. Fasten the spacer with the long M6x16
countersunk screws.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. Fit wheel. To do this use the longer wheel
bolts for fastening the wheels.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 227.
Required scope of parts if the spacers are
removed
Short countersunk screws (M6x12)
Part No: 900.269.047.09
1 set short wheel bolts
Part No: 997.361.203.01
Short anti-theft protection
Part No: 996.361.057.01
f For information on the spacers: Please see the
chapter “SPACERS” on Page 233.
Long wheel bolt
- X: Bolt length approx. 49 mm
- Arrows: spherical cap ring
Wheel bolt identifying features
For identification purposes, the movable spherical
cap ring is galvanised in red on the long wheel
bolts.
The long wheel bolts must only be used together
with 5 mm spacers fitted.
The short wheel bolts are not marked in colour.
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
5 mm spacers fitted.
f Tightening torque for both wheel bolts:
96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
234
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Only use accessories authorized by Porsche.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine
running or the ignition on could cause electrical shock.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the
battery during all work on the electrical
system.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 239.
In storage tray between the front seats
(not on vehicles with iPod, USB, AUX interfaces)
In the passenger’s footwell
Relays
Sockets
Defective relays should be changed only by an
authorized workshop.
Electrical accessories should preferably be
connected to the 12 V sockets.
The sockets and thus the connected electrical
accessories function even if the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
f Please observe the maximum power
consumption.
Note on operation
The tire filling compressor must be connected to
the cigarette lighter.
Note on operation
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Do not operate additional accessories for more
than 5 minutes when engine is off. Continuing to
do so may drain the battery such that it may go
completely dead.
Maximum power consumption for both sockets together: 70 W.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
235
Alarm system, central locking
Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days
The status of the central locking and alarm system
is not changed by disconnecting the battery.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.
Central locking overload protection
If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
switched on or are in standby mode (such as the
luggage compartment light and interior light) are
automatically switched off after approx. 2 hours.
The Radio/PCM is automatically switched off after
approx. 10 minutes.
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
remote control within 7 days, the remote control
standby function is switched off (to save the
vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.
236
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
We recommend using genuine Porsche fuses
for replacement.
Note
f If a fuse blows repeatedly consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Never try to “repair” fuses: you may cause serious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.
Replacing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical system due to short circuits and overloads, the individual circuits are protected by fuses.
The fuse box is located in the driver’s footwell.
A - Plastic gripper
B - Spare fuses
1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
The fuse plan and instructions for
emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid can be found on the inner
side of the cover.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
237
Emergency unlocking of the front luggage
compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the front luggage
compartment lid can be opened only with the aid
of a donor battery.
Note
The engine cannot be started with this method.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
Page 245.
Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse box
using the plastic gripper A (yellow).
A - Plastic gripper (yellow)
C - Positive terminal (red)
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery to the positive
terminal C in the fuse box.
5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the
negative terminal of the donor battery to the
door arrester D.
Note
6. Press button 2 on the remote control for
approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage
compartment lid.
The alarm system is switched off.
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound
when the negative cable is connected.
7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
positive cable.
8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and
push on the plastic fuse box cover.
238
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Battery
The battery is located in the front luggage
compartment under a black plastic cover.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERATION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 74.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLOCKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID” on Page 238.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit, fire and damage to alternator and electronic control units, resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Observe all warning notes on the battery.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the battery during all work on the electrical system.
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal.
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
f Wear eye protection.
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted
surfaces.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doctor.
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
with a solution of baking soda and water to
neutralize the acid.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm.
f Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Risk of explosion as a result of static charge,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
f Eliminate potential electrostatic charge by
touching the vehicle before touching the battery.
Charge state
A well-charged battery prevents starting problems
and has a longer service life.
Traffic density, requirements regarding noise, exhaust gas and fuel consumption reduce the engine
speed and, hence, the alternator output.
However, the large number of electrical loads has
markedly increased the demand for electrical
power.
In order to avoid discharging the battery
unintentionally:
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
f Always remove the ignition key from the ignition switch when leaving the car.
f Avoid frequent operation of the Porsche Communication Management system and audio
system when the engine is not running.
f In the cold season in particular or if the vehicle
is used primarily for short journeys, it may be
necessary to recharge the battery from time to
time.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette.
f Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
Risk of serious personal injury or death and
damage to the fabric, metal or paint.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
239
Battery care
Battery charging
Slow battery charging
f Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when
not in use.
The charge available in your battery can be measured with a battery hydrometer.
We recommend that the battery voltage be tested
by your authorized Porsche dealer who has the appropriate equipment.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you about a suitable charger.
f Keep terminals and connections clean and
properly tightened.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the terminals and connections with petroleum jelly or
silicone spray.
f Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to
prevent spillage.
Checking the electrolyte fluid level
f The acid level should be checked more frequently by a qualified specialist workshop during the summer months and in predominantly
warm countries.
If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sulfates, leading to premature deterioration of the
plates.
Warning!
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
could cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a frozen battery to thaw out first.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
cold water for several minutes and call a doctor.
240
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
1. Always observe the instructions of the charger
manufacturer.
Depending on the type of charger, the battery
may have to be disconnected.
In this case, always disconnect the negative
lead first, and then the positive lead – risk of
short circuit!.
Reconnect the leads in reverse order.
2. Before charging, cold batteries must be
warmed up indoors.
3. Frozen batteries must be thawed out first
before being charged.
4. When charging, ensure that there is adequate
ventilation.
5. Connect the charger to the battery.
Only plug into the mains and switch the
charger on when it is connected up correctly.
6. Switch on the charger.
7. After charging, switch off the charger first and
then disconnect it.
8. Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on Page 241.
Winter operation
Replacing battery
Putting vehicle into operation
The capacity and ability of the battery to store
power decreases at low outside temperatures.
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in
winter months, e.g. by the heated rear window,
more frequent use of additional lights, the fans
and the windshield wipers, etc.
The service life of the battery is subject to normal
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic conditions, and driving conditions (distances, loads).
After the battery is connected or after an exhaustively discharged battery is charged, the multifunctional PSM light lights up on the instrument
panel and a message appears on the on-board
computer to indicate a fault.
f Have the battery checked before the start
of winter.
Maintenance note
Keep the battery well charged to prevent it
from freezing.
A discharged battery can freeze at 23 °F (--5 °C),
but a fully charged battery only freezes at -- 40 °F
(--40 °C).
A frozen battery must always be thawed before
connecting jump leads.
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
correct part number, as a replacement.
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
steps:
1. Start the engine.
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
steering movements to the left and right and
then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out and
the message on the on-board computer
disappears.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
f Perform adaptation of the power windows:
Please see the chapter “STORING END
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS” on Page 28.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
241
Removing the battery
The required tool is in the tool kit.
The battery is located in the front luggage compartment under a black plastic lid.
Warning!
Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
control units.
f Do not disconnect the battery while the engine
is running.
This also applies to cars equipped with a battery main switch.
f Never drive the car with a disconnected battery.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
f Keep vent caps on to avoid spillage.
f Do not tilt the battery when removing and installing it.
1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads.
2. Open turn-locks A.
Remove plastic lid.
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.
242
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
4. Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable danger of short circuit!
5. Unscrew fastening screw B.
6. Remove battery.
Installing the battery
1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
stop.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative (–) ground wire.
3. Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative (–) ground wire danger of short circuit!
4. Push on central vent hose C.
Fitting the plastic lid
1. Insert the two outer hooks of the plastic lid into
the eye mounts of the lid opening.
2. Lower the lid.
4. Turn the turn-locks so that they point in
longitudinal direction.
5. Press the turn-locks down until they audibly
engage.
3. Using both hands, push the lid into the eye
mounts without using force (if too much force
is used, the hooks may jam and the panel will
warp).
Make sure that the lid is correctly seated.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
243
3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.
Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.
Note
f Please dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.
Replacing the remote-control
battery
The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or
when the light-emitting diode no longer flashes
when the remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity).
Replacement battery – Lithium CR 2032,
3 volts.
244
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Emergency Starting with Jumper
Cables
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after
the car has been parked for a long time, the battery of another car can be used for starting with
the help of jumper cables.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the
same. Both batteries must be 12 volt types.
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster
battery must not be substantially less than that of
the discharged battery.
The discharged battery must be correctly connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 239.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLOCKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID” on Page 238.
Note
f Do not try to start the car by pushing or towing. Damage to the catalytic converters and
other components of the car may result.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit, damage and explosion,
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
cross-section and fitted with completely insulated alligator clips.
f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
jumper cable manufacturer.
f When connecting jumper cables, make sure
that they cannot get caught in any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
Danger of caustic burns from escaping acid.
f Do not lean over the battery.
Danger of gas explosion.
f Improper use of booster battery to start a
vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
f Keep sources of ignition away from the battery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
f A discharged battery can freeze even at 23 °F/
–5 °C.
Before connecting jumper cables, a frozen
battery must be thawed out.
f The cable clamps must not be allowed to contact each other when one end of the jumper cables are connected to a battery.
f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelery (rings,
chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
245
Connect jumper cables in the following
sequence:
Always observe the sequence below:
1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the
positive terminal of the discharged battery
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of
the donor battery.
2. First connect the negative cable (black) to
the negative terminal of the donor battery, then
connect it to a suitable grounding point on the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
This grounding point must lie as far as possible
from the battery.
For example, a solid metal part or the engine
block are suitable grounding points.
If no suitable grounding points are to be found
on either vehicle, the negative cable must
carefully be connected directly to the negative
terminal of the battery.
If a suitable grounding point is to be found only
on the donor vehicle, the negative cable must
first be connected to the terminal of the
discharged battery, then to the grounding point
of the donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.
246
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
4. Start the engine.
An attempted start using jumper cables should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
waiting period of at least one minute.
f Note
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, electrical loads such as the heated rear window
and the heating fan blower should be switched
on (the vehicle’s lights must not be switched
on). This reduces voltage peaks which may occur when disconnecting the jumper cables.
With the engine running, remove both jumper
cables in reverse order.
Bulb chart
Lights, Replacing Bulbs
Type, rating
Warning!
Halogen low beam
H7, 55W
Risk of short circuit.
Halogen high beam
H9, 65W
Low beam/high beam with Bi-Xenon headlights
Philips, D2S 35W
f Always switch off the relevant consumer when
changing bulbs.
Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlights
H7, 55 W
Turn signal light, front
Philips HY21W
Turn signal light, side
WY5W
Fog light
H8, 35W
License plate light
C5W
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
The Bi-Xenon headlights are under high
voltage when installed.
f Be careful during all work in the area of the BiXenon headlights.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the lamp housing.
f Only the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.
f New bulbs must be clean and free from oil,
grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
247
Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to excessive temperatures and abrasion.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body
(e.g. “stone guards” or films).
f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
plastic headlight lenses.
In no case may chemical cleaners or other volatile cleaning fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Removing headlights
1. Unscrew plastic nut A.
Detach the side carpeting.
248
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking
opening.
Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet.
Check the function of all lights.
3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking
spindle.
The handle of the wrench should point horizontally to the rear.
Low beam/high beam
Halogen/Bi-Xenon headlight
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180° A. The
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward
slightly during this process.
1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downward B and leave in position.
Opening the lid of the headlight housing
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
tabs C upwards and take off lid.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the fender.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
249
Changing bulb for low beam
Halogen headlights
Changing bulb for high beam
Halogen headlights
1. Pull off plug A.
1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take
it off.
2. Disengage fixing clip B.
3. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
Closing the cover of the headlight housing
1. Push on cover until it is felt to engage.
2. Fasten cover with the 4 screws.
250
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
2. Turn bulb holder clockwise and remove it
(bayonet lock).
3. Pull both plug release tabs apart and pull plug
out.
4. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
5. Insert bulb holder and turn it as far as it will go
to the left.
6. Close the housing cover.
Changing bulb for low beam/high beam
Bi-Xenon headlights
1. Unscrew the 3 screws A on the control unit and
remove the control unit.
2. Turn the plug counter-clockwise and pull it off.
3. Disengage both fixing clips.
4. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
5. Engage both fixing clips, push on plug and turn
right as far as the stop.
6. Fit control unit and screw tight.
Closing the cover of the headlight housing
1. Push on cover until it is felt to engage.
2. Fasten cover with the 4 screws.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
251
Changing bulb for additional high beam
Bi-Xenon headlights
1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take
it off.
252
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
2. Pull off plug.
3. Disengage fixing clip.
4. Replace defective bulb.
5. Engage fixing clip, insert plug and close
housing cover.
Changing bulb for turn signal light
Halogen/Bi-Xenon headlights
1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take
it off.
2. Turn bulb holder counter-clockwise and
remove it (bayonet lock).
3. Replace the defective bulb (bayonet lock).
4. Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
5. Close the housing cover.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
253
A - Fog light height adjustment
Changing bulb for fog lights
1. Pull cover forward in direction of arrow.
2. Loosen the two screws on the bulb housing,
swivel the housing out to the side and
remove it.
3. Pull both plug release tabs apart and pull
plug out.
4. Turn bulb holder in direction of arrow and
remove it.
5. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
6. Insert bulb holder and turn it as far as it will go
to the right. Then insert plug. Make sure that
the two tabs engage correctly.
254
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
7. Fit the lamp housing by first inserting the tab
into the rear opening and then swivel the
housing into installation position.
8. Screw in both screws.
9. Insert the cover with the two tabs into the
openings and then carefully press in the cover
in direction of arrow.
Make sure that the cover is seated correctly.
Changing bulb for side marker light
10.Check operation of the headlight.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the
wheel housing liner parallel to the side marker
housing (in direction of travel).
By pressing with the screwdriver, disengage
the securing spring of the side marker
housing.
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
a screwdriver.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
255
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes
and Long-Life Bulbs
The following lights are equipped with lightemitting diodes (LEDs) or long-life bulbs and
cannot be replaced individually. Replacement also
involves a greater amount of installation work.
– Side light, front,
– Daytime driving lights on vehicles with
Bi-Xenon headlights,
– Tail lights and
– Additional brake lights
f Have the defective light replaced at an authorized Porsche dealer.
3. Remove side marker and undo bulb holder
(bayonet lock).
Number Plate Light
4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
it. Insert holder.
Check operation of the light.
Changing bulb
5. Insert the side marker’s retaining lugs A into
the side section at the front.
Push in side marker until the securing spring B
is felt to engage.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.
256
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
1. Unscrew both screws A and take off the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
3. Reassemble in reverse order.
Check operation of the light.
Adjusting Headlights
f Please see the chapter “LIGHTS, REPLACING
BULBS” on Page 247.
Adjustment
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
The driver’s seat must be loaded by a person or a
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures
must meet the prescribed values.
After being loaded, the car must be rolled a few
meters so that the suspension can settle.
For checking the headlight adjustment, the vertical position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens of
the headlamp.
The correct position of the cutoff is 2.0 in. (5 cm)
at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below a horizontal line,
x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp
lens.
Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
adjustment unit.
Distance
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
24.6 ft./7.5 m (this value is a rounded down conversion from the 25-foot distance typical of field
aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft./7.5 m distance
is measured from the headlamp lens to the viewing screen.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
257
Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.
Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are projected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehicle’s longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
unobstructed, and wide and high enough to accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide at
least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the vehicle’s headlamp spacing.
Adjustment screws
f Detach side carpeting in luggage compartment.
Unscrew plastic nut A.
Open the cover of the appropriate adjustment
screw.
The setting is adjusted by turning the hexagon
socket screws right or left, as appropriate.
258
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
B - Headlight vertical adjustment
Vertical adjustment (screw B)
f turn clockwise = beam moves down
turn counter-clockwise = beam moves up
Note
f Do not alter the lateral adjustment.
Towing
Towing hook
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohibit towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar.
In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
from improper procedures.
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for details.
The towing hook A is contained in the tool box in
the luggage compartment.
Caution!
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
hook.
Vehicle towing
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to
be used on Porsche vehicles.
Under certain circumstances, wheel lifts may be
used when the vehicle will not roll.
The vehicle must be towed with all four
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the vehicle may result.
f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
other vehicle.
PDK selector lever emergency release
f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces.
In the event of an electronics failure, the selector
lever must be released for towing.
1. Lift up the rubber mat in the oddments tray.
2. Insert a screwdriver in the opening and press
down until you feel it reach the limit position.
The selector lever can now be moved to
position N.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
259
Fitting towing hook
Removing towing hook
When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license
plate must be removed.
1. Unscrew the towing hook A.
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover
disengages.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook A.
260
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the
opening.
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
to engage it in the bumper.
When removing on the rear of the vehicle, the
license plate must be mouted.
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not damage rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not damaged.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not disconnect.
Use hoist cable as a safety cable.
Pulling vehicle onto flat bed
Tieing down vehicle on flat bed
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
1. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening in the rear wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not damage rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not damaged.
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
of the vehicle for any interference.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
261
262
Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification .................................. 264
Technical Data .......................................... 266
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires ...................... 267
Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................. 268
Driving Performance .................................. 270
Capacities ................................................ 271
Weights ................................................... 272
Dimensions .............................................. 272
Diagrams ................................................. 273
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
263
Vehicle Identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle data bank
The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the “Maintenance” booklet.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.
Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
2. Type/Type description
3. Engine code/Transmission code
4. Paint No./Interior
5. Optional equipment
Vehicle identification number
Safety compliance sticker
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations,
the vehicle identification number of your car is located at the bottom left of the windshield frame
and can be seen from the outside.
The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
that your new Porsche complies with all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured.
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage
compartment under the battery cover and at the
bottom left behind the windshield.
Removing the battery cover
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 239.
264
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
f The sticker also shows the month and year of
production and the vehicle identification
number of your car (perforations) as well as
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating.
Tire pressure plate
Engine number
The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand
door aperture.
The engine number is stamped on the underside
of the crankcase.
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
265
Technical Data
Engine data
Type
Number of cylinders
Bore
Stroke
Cubic capacity
Net-horsepower
at crankshaft speed
Net torque
at crankshaft speed
Engine oil consumption
266
Technical Data
Cayman
MA120C
Horizontally opposed engine, liquid cooled
6
3.5 in./89 mm
3.1 in./77.5 mm
176.5 cu. in./2893 cm3
265 hp/195 kW
7200 rpm
221 ft. lb./300 Nm
4400 - 6000 rpm
up to 1.6 quarts/622 miles (1.5 liters/1000 km)
Cayman S
MA121C
Horizontally opposed engine, liquid cooled
6
3.8 in./97 mm
3.1 in./77.5 mm
209.7 cu. in./3436 cm3
320 hp/235 kW
7200 rpm
273 ft. lb./370 Nm
4750 rpm
up to 1.6 quarts/622 miles (1.5 liters/1000 km)
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C)
Summer and snow tires Cayman, Cayman S
17 inch wheels
front
rear
30 psi (2.0 bar)
31 psi (2.1 bar)
18 inch wheels
front
rear
30 psi (2.0 bar)
31 psi (2.1 bar)
19 inch wheels
front
rear
32 psi (2.2 bar)
34 psi (2.3 bar)
f These tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on Page 226.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 151.
Technical Data
267
Tires, Rims, Tracks
Cayman
Tires
Summer tires
Rim
Rim offset
Track
7 J x 17 H2
8.5 J x 17 H2
55 mm
40 mm
58.7 in./1490 mm
60.4 in./1534 mm
8 J x 18 H2
9 J x 18 H2
57 mm
43 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
60.2 in./1528 mm
front
rear
205/55 ZR 17 91Y
235/50 ZR 17 96Y
or
front
rear
235/40 ZR 18 91Y
265/40 ZR 18 101Y XL
or
front
rear
235/35 ZR 19 87Y
265/35 ZR 19 94Y
8 J x 19 H2
9.5 J x 19 H2
57 mm
46 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
59.9 in./1522 mm
or
front
rear
235/35 ZR 19 87Y
265/35 ZR 19 94Y
8.5 J x 19 H2
10 J x 19 H2
55 mm
42 mm
58.7 in./1490 mm
60.2 in./1530 mm
Snow tires
or
front
rear
205/55 R 17 91V M+S
* 235/50 R 17 96V M+S
7 J x 17 H2
8.5 J x 17 H2
55 mm
40 mm
58.7 in./1490 mm
60.4 in./1534 mm
front
rear
235/40 R 18 91V M+S
* 255/40 R 18 95V M+S
8 J x 18 H2
9 J x 18 H2
57 mm
43 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
60.2 in./1528 mm
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. ”91“) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. ”V“) are minimum requirements.
268
Technical Data
Cayman S
Tires
Summer tires
Rim
Rim offset
Track
8 J x 18 H2
9 J x 18 H2
57 mm
43 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
60.2 in./1528 mm
front
rear
235/40 ZR 18 91Y
265/40 ZR 18 101Y XL
or
front
rear
235/35 ZR 19 87Y
265/35 ZR 19 94Y
8 J x 19 H2
9.5 J x 19 H2
57 mm
46 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
59.9 in./1522 mm
or
front
rear
235/35 ZR 19 87Y
265/35 ZR 19 94Y
8.5 J x 19 H2
10 J x 19 H2
55 mm
42 mm
58.7 in./1490 mm
60.2 in./1530 mm
8 J x 18 H2
9 J x 18 H2
57 mm
43 mm
58.5 in./1486 mm
60.2 in./1528 mm
Snow tires
front
rear
235/40 R 18 91V M+S
* 255/40 R 18 95V M+S
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. ”91“) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. ”Y“) are minimum requirements.
f When changing tires or fitting new ones: Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on Page 226.
Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by
Porsche may have a dangerous effect on
the driving stability and could result in
serious personal injury or death.
f Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release status.
Tire and rim sizes
Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has information
about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you. If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not
approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s roadability and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on
such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combinations.
Snow chains
Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph/50 km/h. Use only Porsche authorized fine-link
cross-type or edge chains. Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only with the tire + rim combination marked*
without spacers. Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on Page 233.
Technical Data
269
Driving Performance*
Cayman
Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
Top track speed
6-speed transmission
Acceleration 0 – 60 mph
Acceleration 0 – 60 mph with Sport+
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph)
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport+
Cayman S
Top track speed
Acceleration 0 – 60 mph
Acceleration 0 – 60 mph with Sport+
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph)
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport+
165 mph/265 km/h
163 mph/263 km/h
5.5 seconds
5.4 seconds
5.2 seconds
5.7 seconds
5.5 seconds
5.8 seconds
Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung
172 mph/277 km/h
4.9 seconds
5.2 seconds
* At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment.
270
Technical Data
171 mph/275 km/h
4.8 seconds
4.6 seconds
5.1 seconds
4.9 seconds
Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.
Engine
Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 1.98 U.S.gallons/7.5 liters
Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION” on Page 190.
Coolant
Cayman: approx. 6.05 - 6.18 U.S. gallons/22.9 - 23.4 liters
Cayman S: approx. 6.13 - 6.61 U.S. gallons/23.3 - 25 liters
Manual transmission and differential Cayman: approx. 0.79 U.S. gallons/3 liters
Cayman S: approx. 0.85 U.S. gallons/3.2 liters
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Gear set
approx. 0.78 U.S. gallons/2.95 liters
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Clutch/Hydraulic fluid
approx. 1.37 U.S. gallons/5.2 liters
Power steering
approx. 1.1 quarts/1 liter hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S® or CHF 202 S®
Brake fluid
approx. 0.4 quarts/0.39 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid
Windshield washer
approx. 0.66 U.S. gallons/2.5 liters without headlight washer
approx. 1.58 U.S. gallons/6 liters with headlight washer
Fuel tank
Refill volume approx. 16.9 U.S. gallons/64 liters, including approx. 2.6 U.S.gallons/10 liters reserve.
Fuel quality
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using unleaded premium fuel with
an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate
properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s
”Electronic Octane™ knock control“ will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
Technical Data
271
Weights
Cayman
Manual transmission
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment)
Maximum gross weight
Maximum axle load, front*
Maximum axle load, rear*
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System**
2932 lbs. to 3153 lbs.
1330 kg to 1430 kg
3605 lbs./1635 kg
1731 lbs./785 kg
2017 lbs./915 kg
132 lbs./60 kg
2998 lbs. to 3230 lbs.
1360 kg to 1465 kg
3682 lbs./1670 kg
1731 lbs./785 kg
2017 lbs./915 kg
132 lbs./60 kg
Cayman S
Manual transmission
Porsche Doppelkupplung
Empty weight (depending on equipment)
2976 lbs. to 3175 lbs.
1350 kg to 1440 kg
3627 lbs./1645 kg
1731 lbs./785 kg
2072 lbs./940 kg
132 lbs./60 kg
3031 lbs. to 3241 lbs.
1375 kg to 1470 kg
3693 lbs./1675 kg
1731 lbs./785 kg
2072 lbs./940 kg
132 lbs./60 kg
Maximum gross weight
Maximum axle load, front*
Maximum axle load, rear*
Maximum useful load, Roof Transport System**
*The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
**Use only Original PorscheRoof Transport System
Dimensions
Length
Width
Width with door mirrors
Height
Wheelbase
Ground clearance
Turning circle
272
Technical Data
Cayman
Cayman S
171.1 in./4347 mm
70.9 in./1801 mm
76.9 in./1952 mm
51.3 in./1304 mm, with PASM 50.9 in./1294 mm
95.1 in./2415 mm
4.5 in./115 mm, with PASM 4.2 in./107 mm
36.4 ft./11.1 m
171.1 in./4347 mm
70.9 in./1801 mm
76.9 in./1952 mm
51.4 in./1306 mm, with PASM 51.0 in./1296 mm
95.1 in./2415 mm
4.4 in./112 mm, with PASM 4.1 in./104 mm
36.4 ft./11.1 m
Diagrams
Engine diagram at full power, Cayman
Technical Data
273
Engine diagram at full power, Cayman S
274
Technical Data
A
ABS (antilock brake system) .......................... 59
Warning light ........................................ 60
Adaptive sports seat ..................................... 33
Adjusting Headlights.................................... 257
Advanced Airbag........................................... 45
Air conditioning........................................... 110
Air conditioning compressor ................ 113, 115
Air conditioning system ............................... 113
Air distribution ............................ 110, 113, 115
Air filter...................................................... 201
Air intake.................................................... 116
Airbag.......................................................... 44
Cleaning covers .................................. 208
Function ............................................... 45
Warning light ........................................ 48
Air-conditioning compressor ........................ 112
Alarm system .......................................25, 103
Deactivating passenger compartment
monitoring............................................ 26
Fault indication...................................... 26
Function indication ................................ 25
Not active .......................................... 236
Alcantara, cleaning ..................................... 209
Antenna ..................................... 103, 104, 204
Antifreeze .................................................. 187
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................... 59
Warning light ........................................ 60
Ashtray ........................................................ 89
Assembly aids for wheel changes................. 227
Audio operation .................................. 101, 102
Auto-button, air conditioning ........................ 113
Automatic
Air conditioning system ....................... 113
Anti-glare mirrors ..................................30
Car washes ........................................204
Door locking ...................................18, 24
Garage door .........................................76
Headlight adjustment.............................79
Speed control .........................86, 87, 124
Transmission ......................................178
Automatic speed control..............................124
Indicator light......................................124
Average consumption..........................135, 165
Average speed ...................................135, 165
B
Backrest
Adjustment ...........................................32
Release ................................................32
Battery.......................................................239
Care...................................................240
Charge state.......................................239
Charging ............................................240
Putting vehicle into operation ...............241
Remote control ...................................244
Removing ...........................................242
Replacing ...........................................241
Warning light.......................................132
Winter operation..................................241
Before driving off ........................................8, 9
Belts ............................................................42
Cleaning .............................................209
Tensioner .............................................42
Warning light.........................................43
Blower adjustment ..............................110, 116
Blower speed adjustment ............................114
Brake
Break in............................................... 10
Pads ................................................... 58
Pedal................................................... 57
Wear ................................................... 58
Brake fluid
Changing ........................................... 193
Checking level.................................... 192
Level ................................................. 192
Warning light...................................... 193
Brake light ................................................. 256
Brake light, additional ................................. 256
Brakes ...................................................... 192
Brake circuit division warning light ....... 193
Brake warning light............................. 132
Fluid .......................................... 192, 271
Fluid warning light............................... 193
Function .............................................. 56
New brake pads or linings..................... 58
Pads ................................................... 10
Parking brake....................................... 55
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
(PCCB) .................................................. 4
Test stand ........................................... 65
Break in brakes............................................ 10
Break in hints............................................... 10
Bulbs
Chart................................................. 247
Replacing .......................................... 247
Index
275
C
Capacities, overview ................................... 271
Car care .................................................... 203
Car telephone............................................. 103
Car washes ................................................ 204
Cargo partition ............................................. 97
Carpet ....................................................... 209
Catalytic converters .................................... 199
Cautions ............................................ 186, 212
Central locking ........................................... 236
Emergency operation ...................... 19, 22
In cars with alarm system ...................... 21
In cars without alarm system ................. 19
Overload protection ............................ 236
Central vents .............................................. 116
Central warning light ................................... 132
Changing light-emitting diodes (LEDs) ........... 256
Changing wheels ........................................ 227
Check engine
Warning light ...................................... 132
Check engine warning light .......................... 133
Opening the oil filler cap ...................... 189
Checking pressure...................................... 228
Child restraint anchorage .............................. 54
Child restraint systems.................................. 50
Chime .................................................... 78, 80
CHRONO Stopwatch.................................... 144
Cigarette lighter............................................ 90
Circulating-air button ........................... 110, 114
Clock ................................................. 131, 164
Clutch .................................................. 60, 176
Clutch pedal ................................................. 60
Combination filter ....................................... 201
Comfort seat ................................................ 33
276
Index
Coming home mode................................79, 80
Communication management.......................101
Compact disc
Player ................................................102
Storage................................................92
Compartment monitoring...............................25
Coolant ......................................128, 187, 271
Checking ............................................187
Level..................................................187
Temperature gage ..............................128
Topping off.........................................187
Warning light.......................................128
Cooling system...................................128, 187
Warning light.......................................128
Cornering light..............................................78
Indicator light......................................127
Crankcase ventilation ..................................199
Cruise control.................................86, 87, 132
Cupholder ....................................................88
D
Data bank...................................................264
Daytime driving lights ....................................78
Changing bulbs ...................................256
On-board computer .............................164
Defrosting windows.......................31, 110, 114
Diagnostic socket .........................................11
Dimensions ................................................272
Direction indicator light, front.......................256
Door ............................................................18
Handles................................................18
Locks...........................................18, 205
Mirror...................................................30
Mirror heating .......................................31
Mirrors .................................................29
Windows.................................18, 27, 206
Drive-Off Assistant.......................................177
Driving
Hints ......................................................8
Winter ................................................183
Driving off
Drive-Off Assistant ...............................177
Launch Control....................................181
Driving performance....................................270
Drop-center rim...........................................223
E
Electrical system.........................................235
Emergency flasher switch ..............................77
Emergency operation ....................................22
Central locking ................................19, 22
Ignition key ...........................................74
Lids....................................................238
Tank flap ............................................195
Emergency service .....................................212
Emergency starting with jumper cables.245, 246
Emission control system..............133, 198, 199
Engine
Checking the oil level ...........................161
Diagram .............................................273
Exhaust ..................................................5
Number ..............................................265
Oil consumption ............................10, 188
Oil level ..............................................189
Oil level indicator.................................161
Oils ............................................188, 271
Speeds.................................................10
Starting ................................................75
Stopping .............................................. 76
Engine compartment
Blower ......................................... 76, 128
Blower fan .......................................... 128
Care .................................................. 205
Engine oil
Change .............................................. 190
Consumption ........................................ 10
Performance class .............................. 191
Recommendation ................................ 190
Topping off.........................................189
Viscosity ............................................ 191
Exhaust
Pipes ..................................................... 5
System ................................................ 55
Tailpipes, stainless steel...................... 207
External antenna .........................................104
F
Filler flap .................................................... 195
Fire extinguisher ........................................... 85
Flat tire ...................................................... 229
Floor mats.................................................. 209
Fluids......................................................... 201
FM reception .............................................. 101
Fog light ...................................................... 80
Fog light, rear.........................................78, 80
Fog lights
Changing bulb..................................... 254
Footbrake .................................................... 56
Footwell lights .............................................. 69
Fresh air intake........................................... 116
Front lid ............................................... 94, 100
Front luggage compartment .......................... 94
Fuel ...................................................130, 195
Containers......................................4, 197
Economy ............................................194
Evaporation control .............................197
Fuels containing ethanol.......................197
Level gage .........................................130
Level warning light ..............................130
Recommendation ........................196, 197
Recommendations ..............................196
Tank ..................................................196
Function keys ...............................................40
Fuses, replacing .........................................237
G
Garage
Door ....................................................76
Door opener .......................................106
Lift .....................................................232
Gear display .......................................120, 122
Gear shift indicator......................................127
Glove compartment.......................................92
Gong..................................14, 73, 78, 80, 137
Ground clearance............................................4
H
Handbrake....................................................55
Hands-free microphone ...............................104
Head restraints .............................................32
Headlights ..................................................248
Adjusting ....................................257, 258
Beam adjustment ..................................79
Changing bulbs ...........................249, 251
Cleaning system ...................82, 200, 271
Flasher ................................................ 81
Removing .......................................... 248
Heated rear window ..................................... 31
Heated rear window/Door mirror heating ..... 117
Heater....................................................... 113
Heating ..................................................... 110
High beam
Indicator light ..................................... 127
Lever............................................. 78, 80
High beam, additional
Changing bulb .................................... 251
High-pressure cleaning units........................ 203
Home mode........................................... 79, 80
HomeLink .................................................. 106
Hoods ................................................. 94, 100
Horn ..................................................... 12, 21
Hot exhaust pipes .......................................... 5
I
Ignition key .................................................. 72
Emergency operation ........................... 74
Ignition lock ................................................. 72
Withdrawing ignition key,
PDK transmission ............................... 180
Immobilizer.................................................. 15
Indicator lights ................................... 120, 122
INFO Warning messages ............................. 140
Instrument
Illumination......................................... 124
Lights............................................ 78, 80
Panel................................. 120, 122, 166
Interior ........................................................ 69
Interior lights ............................................... 69
Interior mirror .............................................. 30
Index
277
J
Jumper cables............................................ 245
K
Key codes.................................................... 15
Keys ...................................................... 15, 16
M
L
LATCH System ............................................. 53
Launch Control ........................................... 181
Leather care .............................................. 208
License plate light................................... 78, 80
Lids ............................................... 93, 94, 100
Emergency unlocking .......................... 238
Lifting vehicle ............................................. 232
Light
Daytime driving..................................... 78
Flasher............................. 78, 80, 81, 127
Low beam ................................ 78, 80, 81
Sensor for instrument illumination 120, 122
Switch...................................... 78, 80, 81
Light alloy wheels
Inscription .......................................... 223
Light functions, individual............................... 81
Lights .......................................................... 69
Care .................................................. 208
Headlight beam adjustment ................... 79
LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for speed limit 137
Load switch-off ........................................... 236
Loading information .................................... 224
Locking.................................................. 20, 23
Low beam .................................................... 81
Luggage compartment............................ 94, 96
278
Lid warning light..............................93, 95
Lids .....................................................93
Unlocking lid .........................................16
Luggage compartment, warning lights ............93
Luggage cover .............................................99
Luggage net .................................................96
Index
Maintenance ...............................................186
Make-up mirror .............................................41
Maximum permitted engine speeds ................10
Manual transmission............................176
Microphone ................................................104
Mirror
Folding in..............................................30
Heating ........................................31, 117
Inside ...................................................29
Mirrors...................................................29, 71
Anti-glare ..............................................30
Multi-functional steering wheel........................40
N
Navigation ..................................................101
Selection field, on-board computer .......150
Notes on
Car care.............................................203
Maintenance .......................................186
Number plate light ..................................78, 80
Changing bulb.....................................256
O
Octane rating......................................196, 197
Odometer...................................................125
Off delay ................................................79, 80
Oil......................................................188, 271
Change...............................................190
Checking level.....................................161
Consumption.........................................10
Level checks.......................................189
Level indicator ....................................161
Recommendation ................................190
Topping off engine oil ..........................189
OIL Display and measurement
of the engine oil level...................................161
On-board computer .....................................134
Basic settings .............................135, 163
Calling on-board computer functions .....135
Functions and display possibilities ........135
General information .............................164
Language versions ..............................163
Operation, controls..............................134
Selecting a radio station ......................150
Setting the clock .................................164
Switching daytime driving lights on/off ..164
Switching on navigation .......................150
Tire pressure warnings ........................156
Warnings and messages ......................166
On-board literature ..........................................2
Operating voice control ...............................134
Operating your Porsche in other Countries ....194
Orientation light ............................................69
Outside temperatur indicator........................131
Oxygen sensor............................................199
P
Paint
Care .......................................... 203, 205
Data................................................... 265
ParkAssistant ............................................... 70
Parking
PDK transmission................................ 183
Parking aids ........................................... 70, 71
Parking brake ............................................... 55
Warning light ........................................ 56
Parking light ..................................... 78, 80, 81
Particle filter............................................... 201
Passenger compartment monitoring............... 25
PDK transmission ....................................... 178
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 177
Driving in winter .................................. 183
Faults................................................. 179
Kickdown ........................................... 181
Launch Control ................................... 181
Manual selection mode ........................ 182
Reduced driving program ....................184
Selector lever emergency release ........ 259
Selector lever positions ....................... 180
Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..... 181
Sport mode ........................................ 180
Transmission fluid ............................... 201
Warning messages.............................. 184
Pen holder.................................................... 92
Plastic parts ............................................... 208
Care .................................................. 208
Platform lift ................................................ 232
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM)......................................................... 66
Sport mode .......................................... 66
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) .......4
Porsche Communication Management (PCM).101
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....................178
Drive-Off Assistant...............................177
Driving in winter ..................................183
Faults.................................................179
Kickdown............................................182
Launch Control....................................178
Manual selection mode ........................182
Reduced driving program.....................184
Selector lever emergency release ........259
Selector lever position.................178, 180
Shifting gears on the steering wheel .....181
Sport mode ........................................180
Transmission fluid ...............................201
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............63
Information light ....................................65
Power steering fluid level.....................201, 271
Power windows.............................................18
Practical tips ..............................................212
Putting vehicle into operation .......................241
R
Radiator fan..........................................76, 188
Radio reception ..........................................101
Rain sensor ..................................................82
Range on remaining fuel ......................135, 164
Rear fender
Retractable...........................................67
Rear lid ..................................................94, 95
Unlocking .............................................16
Rear luggage compartment ...........................96
Rear spoiler............................................67, 68
Rear view mirrors....................................29, 30
Rear window defogger.......................... 31, 117
Rear window heating .................................. 117
Recirculating-air button ............................... 114
Refuelling .................................................. 196
Relays ....................................................... 235
Remote control ............................................ 16
Readiness............................................ 17
Replacing battery ............................... 244
Standby funktion .................................. 17
Synchronization.................................... 17
Replacement key.......................................... 15
Replacing bulbs.......................................... 247
Replacing wiper blades ............................... 202
Retractable spoiler ....................................... 67
Rims
Diameter ........................................... 223
Rim width........................................... 223
TPM sensors...................................... 219
Roof transport system ................................ 105
Running in.................................................... 10
S
Safety belts ................................................. 42
Cleaning ............................................ 209
Tensioner ............................................ 42
Warning light........................................ 43
Safety compliance sticker........................... 264
Sealing set ................................................ 230
Seals ........................................................ 208
Care.................................................. 208
Seat
Adaptive sports seat............................. 33
Adjustment .......................................... 32
Comfort seat ....................................... 33
Index
279
Heating ................................................ 37
Memory ............................................... 35
Position................................................ 32
Sports bucket seat ............................... 34
Sports seat .......................................... 33
Standard seat....................................... 33
Ventilation ............................................ 38
Seat memory
Operating with the remote control .......... 36
Operation with person buttons ............... 35
Selector lever position ........................ 120, 122
Selector lever position indicator,
PDK transmission ....................................... 179
Service ...................................................... 141
SET Basic setting on on-board computer ...... 163
Shift indicator ............................................. 127
Shifting gears
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 177
Manual transmission............................ 176
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ............ 178
Side light, front........................................... 256
Side marker light .................................... 78, 80
Changing bulb..................................... 255
Side storage compartment ............................ 92
Side vents .................................................. 116
Snow chains............................... 221, 267, 269
Snow tires.......................................... 220, 268
Socket....................................................... 235
Spacers ..................................................... 233
Spare key .................................................... 15
Spare wheel ............................................... 267
Speed code letter ....................................... 222
Speed control....................................... 87, 110
Automatic............................................. 86
280
Index
Indicator light......................................124
Speed limit .........................................137, 222
Speedometer .............................................126
Spoiler .........................................................67
Fixed....................................................68
Retractable...........................................67
Sport Chrono Plus package
CHRONO stopwatch ............................144
Sport mode ..........................................61
Sport mode ..................................................65
PDK transmission................................180
Switching on/off....................................61
Switching PASM on/off ..........................66
Sport plus mode ...........................................61
Sports bucket seat .......................................34
Sports exhaust system..................................55
Sports seat ..................................................33
Stability management system ........................63
Standard seat...............................................33
Starter switch ...............................................72
Starting........................................................73
Starting engine .............................................75
Steering column
Locking ................................................73
Steering lock ................................................72
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................................38
Function keys........................................40
Heating ................................................39
Lock ....................................................73
Multi functional......................................40
PDK shift buttons ................................178
Stopping engine............................................76
Stopwatch..................................................144
Storage options ............................................91
Storage possibilities ......................................91
Storing your Porsche...................................210
Sun visors ....................................................41
Suspension management...............................66
T
Tachometer ................................................127
Tail light .....................................................256
Tank ..................................................195, 196
Ventilation system ...............................197
Technical data ............................................266
TEL Telephone information...........................141
Telephone ..................................................103
Microphone.........................................104
Temperature setting....................110, 113, 114
Temperature, outside indicator.....................131
Test stand, measurements ............................65
Theft protection ............................................14
Tie-down rings ..............................................96
Tire
Care...................................................217
Damage .............................................217
Designations .......................................221
Pressure plate ....................................215
Replacements .....................................218
Traction..............................................216
Wear ..................................................216
Tire pressure monitoring
Warning light.......................................159
Wheels ...............................................219
Tire pressure monitoring (TPM) ....................151
Tires ....................................10, 213, 268, 269
Care...................................................213
Checking pressure .............................. 228
Inscription .......................................... 222
Loading information ............................ 224
New tires ............................................. 10
Pressure .................................... 214, 270
Pressure monitoring............................ 151
Pressure plate .................................... 265
Removing and storing.......................... 219
Sealant ...................................... 229, 230
Sidewall .............................................222
Size ................................................... 222
Snow tires .......................................... 220
Tools ........................................................... 94
Towing............................................... 259, 261
Towing hook............................................... 259
TPM Tire pressure monitoring...................... 151
Track......................................................... 268
Transmission
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 176
Fluid........................................... 201, 271
Manual transmission............................ 176
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .... 176, 178
Trip Odometer ............................................ 125
Trunk entrapment ....................................... 100
Turn signal
Indicator light...................................... 127
Turn signal light, front
Changing bulb..................................... 253
Turn signals ......................................... 81, 127
U
W
Undercoating......................................198, 206
Warning lights and messages...................... 166
Washer
Fluid .................................................. 200
Fluid warning light............................... 200
Washer fluid............................................... 271
Washer lever................................................ 82
Washing .................................................... 204
Weights ..................................................... 272
Welcome Home Function ........................ 79, 80
Wheel.................................. 10, 213, 268, 269
Alignment .......................................... 219
Balancing........................................... 219
Bolts ................................................. 226
Care.................................................. 213
Changing ........................................... 229
Checking pressure ............................. 228
Inscription.......................................... 222
Loading information............................ 224
Securing bolts.................................... 226
Security wheel bolts ............................. 15
Sidewall............................................. 222
Size .................................................. 222
Tire pressure ..................................... 214
Tire pressure plate ............................. 265
Tire sealant................................ 229, 230
Wheels
Assembly aids for wheel changes ........ 227
Care.................................................. 207
TPM sensors...................................... 219
Windows.................................................... 206
Anti-crushing protection ........................ 28
Care.................................................. 206
Opening/Closing .................................. 27
V
Valves ........................................................218
Vanity mirror.................................................41
Vehicle
Care...................................................203
Engine number....................................265
Identification .......................................264
Identification label ...............................264
Identification number ...........................264
Lifting.................................................232
Load capacity .....................................225
Putting into operation ..........................241
Safety compliance sticker....................264
Washing .............................................204
Vehicle identification number........................264
Ventilation ..................................................113
Vents .........................................110, 113, 116
Viscosity, engine oil.....................................191
Voice control, button ...................................134
Voice control, PCM .....................................134
Index
281
Washer nozzles .................................... 82
Washer system ........................... 200, 271
Windshield
Wiper blades, changing ....................... 202
Windshield wipers ................................. 82, 202
Replacing ........................................... 202
Winter operation
Battery............................................... 241
Coolant .............................................. 187
Engine oil ........................................... 188
Jumper cables ............................ 245, 246
Locks ................................................ 205
Seals ................................................. 208
Snow chains ....................................... 221
Tires .................................................. 220
Washer fluid ....................................... 200
Wiper blades ...................................... 202
Wiper
Blades ............................................... 202
Wiper blades
Care .................................................. 206
Changing............................................ 202
282
Index
Open as PDF
Similar pages